Pioneer Avic X710 Bt Operation Manual
AVIC-X910BT AVIC-X710BT_OperationManual0512
AVIC X710 BT - Operation Manual AVIC-X710BT_OM_EN Free User Guide for Pioneer GPS, Manual - page2
2015-07-27
: Pioneer Pioneer-Avic-X710-Bt-Operation-Manual-778597 pioneer-avic-x710-bt-operation-manual-778597 pioneer pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 214 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]
Operation Manual
FLASH MEMORY MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION
RECEIVER
AVIC-X910BT
AVIC-X710BT
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system is
properly connected to your vehicle’s parking brake and
depending on your vehicle, additional installation may
be required. For more information, please contact your
Authorized Pioneer Electronics retailer or call us at
(800) 421-1404.
English
Thank you for buying this Pioneer product.
Please read through these operating instructions so you will know how to operate
your model properly. After you have finished reading the instructions, keep this man-
ual in a safe place for future reference.
Important
The screens shown in the examples may differ
from actual screens.
Actual screens may be changed without notice
for performance and function improvements.
Introduction
Information to User 9
License Agreement 10
–PIONEER AVIC-X910BT, AVIC-X710BT -
for U.S.A. 10
–PIONEER AVIC-X910BT, AVIC-X710BT -
for Canada 12
–Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas
Data 14
–Licenses 16
About the database 19
–About the Data for the Map
Database 19
–Copyright Notices for North American
data 20
Important Safety Information 20
–“GOOG-411”sevice 22
–Speed limit indication 22
Additional Safety Information 22
–Parking brake interlock 22
–When using a display connected to
REAR MONITOR OUTPUT 23
–To avoid battery exhaustion 23
–Rear view camera 23
Notes Before Using the System 23
–Failure to operate 23
–Visit Our Web site 24
Manual overview 24
–How to use this manual 24
–Terminology 24
–Definitions of terminology 24
Notice regarding video viewing 25
Notice regarding DVD-Video viewing 25
Notice regarding MP3 file usage 25
iPod compatibility 25
Map coverage 26
Protecting the LCD panel and screen 26
Notes on internal memory 26
–Before removing the vehicle
battery 26
–Data subject to erasure 26
–Resetting the microprocessor 26
Basic operation
Checking part names and functions 28
Inserting and ejecting a disc 29
–Inserting a disc 29
–Ejecting a disc 29
Inserting and ejecting an SD memory
card 29
–Inserting an SD memory card 30
–Ejecting an SD memory card 30
Plugging and unplugging a USB storage
device 30
–Plugging in a USB storage device 30
–Unplugging a USB storage device 30
Connecting and disconnecting an iPod 31
–Connecting your iPod 31
–Disconnecting your iPod 31
Flow from startup to termination 31
–On first-time startup 31
Regular startup 32
How to use the navigation menu
screens 34
–Screen switching overview 34
–What you can do on each menu 35
–Displaying the rear view camera
image 35
How to use the map 36
–How to read the map screen 36
–Switching the map mode 38
Contents
En
2
–Changing the scale of the map 38
–Scrolling the map to the position you
want to see 39
–Changing the tilt and rotation angle of
the map 39
The basic flow of creating your route 40
Operating list screens (e.g. city list) 40
Operating the on-screen keyboard 41
Searching for and selecting a location
Searching for a location by address 42
Searching for the vicinity Points of Interest
(POI) 44
–Searching for POIs around the
cursor 44
–Searching for a nearby POI 45
–Searching for POIs along the current
route 45
–Searching for POIs around the
destination 45
–Searching for POIs around the
address 45
–Using “Saved Criteria”46
Searching for POIs by using the data on
external storage devices (USB, SD) 48
Searching for a location by coordinates 49
Selecting a location you searched for
recently 50
–Deleting an entry in “History”50
Selecting a location stored in “Favorites”50
–Deleting an entry in “Favorites”51
Setting up a route to your home 51
Setting a route by recalling a saved route 51
Searching for a location by scrolling the
map 52
After the location is decided (Map
Confirmation Screen)
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation
Screen”54
Route... 54
Save as... 55
Setting the location as a new destination 55
Setting the location as a waypoint 55
Replacing the location as the new final
destination 55
Setting the location as the start point 55
Viewing information about a specified
location 56
Placing a map pin on the location 56
–Removing a map pin 57
Registering the location as a customized
POI 57
Storing the location in “Favorites”58
Deleting an entry in “Favorites”58
Checking the current route
Checking the current route conditions 59
–Playing simulated travel at high
speed 60
–Checking the entire route overview on
the map 60
Checking the current itinerary 60
Editing waypoints and the destination
Editing waypoints 62
–Adding a waypoint 62
–Sorting waypoints 62
–Deleting a waypoint 62
Storing the current route 62
–Deleting the entry in “Saved
Routes”63
Deleting the current route 63
Browsing information on MSN Direct
Activating the service 64
–Checking your product key 64
–Subscribing to the MSN Direct
service 65
En 3
Contents
–Activating the MSN Direct
function 65
Browsing gas prices 65
Browsing movie times 66
–Searching for a theater by selecting a
movie title 66
–Searching for a movie title by selecting
a theater 67
Browsing weather information 68
–Checking the local weather
information 68
–Checking worldwide weather
conditions 68
Using traffic information 68
–Viewing the traffic event 68
–Viewing the traffic flow 69
–Setting the traffic information 70
Browsing news headlines 71
Browsing local events 71
Browsing stock quotes 72
–Selecting stock symbols 72
–Viewing the detailed stock quotes 72
Using hands-free phoning
Hands-free phoning overview 73
Preparing communication devices 73
Displaying the Phone Menu 73
Registering your cellular phone 73
–Searching for nearby phones 74
–Searching for a specified phone 74
–Pairing from your cellular phone 75
Connecting a registered cellular phone 76
–Disconnecting a cellular phone 76
–Deleting a registered phone 76
Receiving a phone call 77
–Answering an incoming call 77
–Rejecting an incoming call 77
Making a phone call 77
–Direct dialing 78
–Dialing from the history 78
–Calling a number in the “Contacts”
screen 79
–Dialing a phone number of the POI 79
–Making a call home easily 79
–Dialing GOOG-411 80
Announcing incoming short mails 80
Transferring the phone book 80
Clearing memory 81
Setting the phone 82
–Setting the phone volume 82
–Stopping Bluetooth wave
transmission 82
–Answering a call automatically 82
–Setting the automatic rejection
function 83
–Echo canceling and noise
reduction 83
–Setting automatic connection 83
–Editing the device name 83
Notes for hands-free phoning 84
Updating the Bluetooth wireless technology
software 85
Playing audio CDs
Reading the screen 86
Using the touch panel keys 86
Selecting a track from the list 87
Using the “Function”menu 87
Playing music files on ROM
Reading the screen 88
Using the touch panel keys 88
–Selecting a track from the list 89
–Browsing embedded text
information 89
Using the “Function”menu 90
Playing a DVD-Video
Reading the screen 91
Using the touch panel keys 91
Contents
En
4
–Resuming playback (Bookmark) 93
–Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 93
–Direct number search 93
–Operating the DVD menu 93
–Frame-by-frame playback 94
–Slow motion playback 94
Using the “Function”menu 94
Playing a DVD-VR disc
Reading the screen 96
Using the touch panel keys 96
–Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 97
–Switch the playback mode 98
–Using the short-time skip function 98
–Playing by selecting from the title
list 98
–Frame-by-frame playback 98
–Slow motion playback 98
Using the “Function”menu 99
Playing a DivX video
Reading the screen 100
Using the touch panel keys 100
–Frame-by-frame playback 101
–Slow motion playback 101
–Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 101
Using the “Function”menu 102
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
Displaying DVD Setup menu 103
Setting the top-priority languages 103
Setting the angle icon display 103
Setting the aspect ratio 104
Setting the parental lock 104
–Setting the code number and
level 104
Displaying your DivX VOD registration
code 105
Setting “Auto Play”105
Setting the subtitle file for DivX 105
Language code chart for DVDs 106
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Starting procedure 107
Reading the screen 107
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 108
–Selecting a track from the list 109
–Browsing embedded text
information 109
Using the “Function”menu 109
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Starting procedure 111
Reading the screen 111
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 112
–Searching for a specific scene and
starting playback from a specified
time 112
Using the “Function”menu 113
Using an iPod (iPod)
Starting procedure 114
Reading the screen 114
Using the touch panel keys (Music) 115
–Browsing for a song 115
Starting the video playback 116
Using the touch panel keys (Video) 117
–Browsing for a video 117
Using the “Function”menu 118
Using the radio (FM)
Reading the screen 120
Using the touch panel keys 120
En 5
Contents
–Switching between the detailed
information display and the preset list
display 121
–Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 121
Using the “Function”menu 121
–Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 121
–Tuning in strong signals 122
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
Reading the screen 123
Using the touch panel keys 123
–Switching between the detailed
information display and the preset list
display 124
–Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 124
Switching the display 124
Using the “Function”menu 124
–Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 125
–Switching the seek mode 125
–Tuning in strong signals 125
–Switching the reception mode 125
Using the radio (AM)
Reading the screen 126
Using the touch panel keys 126
–Switching between the detailed
information display and the preset list
display 126
–Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies 127
Using the “Function”menu 127
–Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies 127
–Tuning in strong signals 127
Using the XM tuner
Reading the screen 129
Using the touch panel keys 130
–Selecting an XM channel directly 130
–Displaying the Radio ID 131
–Storing and recalling broadcast
stations 131
–Selecting a channel from the list 131
–Using “My Mix”function 132
–Using the direct traffic announcement
function 132
Using the “Function”menu 133
–Setting the memorized songs 133
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Reading the screen 134
Using the touch panel keys 134
–Selecting a SIRIUS channel
directly 135
–Display the Radio ID 135
–Storing and recalling broadcast
stations 136
–Using “My Mix”function 136
–Using the direct traffic announcement
function 136
–Using the “Instant Replay”
function 137
Using the “Function”menu 137
–Setting the memorized songs 138
–Using the Game Alert function 138
–Displaying Game Information 139
Using AV input
Using AV1 140
Using AV2 140
Using the touch panel keys 140
Using the external unit (EXT1, EXT2)
Reading the screen 141
Using the touch panel keys 141
Contents
En
6
Customizing preferences
The options in the “Navi Settings”
menu 143
–Basic operations in the “Navi Settings”
menu 143
–GPS & Time Settings 143
–Time Settings 144
–POI Settings 145
–3D Settings 145
–Map Settings 145
–Displayed Info 146
–Smart Zoom 146
–Overview Mode 147
–Manage Track Logs 147
–Route 147
–Warnings 148
–Regional Settings 149
–Set Home 149
–Demo Mode 149
–Sound settings 149
–About 150
–POI display settings 150
–Creating new categories 151
–Editing your customized POI 152
–Recording your travel history 152
–Setting your home position 154
Options on the “System Settings”menu 154
–Displaying the “System Settings”
menu 154
–Selecting the language 155
–Changing the splash screen 155
–Setting the rear view camera 156
–Adjusting the response positions of the
touch panel (touch panel
calibration) 157
–Adjusting the screen brightness 157
–Setting the illumination color 157
–Checking the version information 158
–Restore Factory Settings 158
–Turning off the screen 159
The “AV Sound Settings”menu options 159
–Displaying the “AV Sound Settings”
menu 159
–Using balance adjustment 159
–Using the equalizer 160
–Adjusting loudness 161
–Using subwoofer output 162
–Using the high pass filter 162
–Adjusting source levels 162
–Enhancing bass (Bass Booster) 163
Options on the “AV System Settings”
menu 163
–Displaying the “AV System Settings”
menu 163
–Setting video input 1 (AV1) 163
–Setting video input 2 (AV2) 163
–Switching the auto antenna
setting 164
–Changing the wide screen mode 164
–Switching the sound muting/
attenuation 164
–Setting the rear output 165
–Acquiring/Cataloging iPod music
information 165
Operating Your Navigation System with
Voice
To Ensure Safe Driving 167
Basics of Voice Operation 167
–Flow of voice operation 167
–Starting voice operation 168
Operating iPod by voice 168
Calling the entry on “Contacts”168
Available Basic Voice Commands 169
–Basic commands 169
–Voice operation for the iPod 169
–Voice operation for AV source (other
than iPod) 170
En 7
Contents
–Voice commands related to hands-free
phoning 171
Tips for Voice Operation 172
Other functions
Setting the anti-theft function 173
–Setting the password 173
–Entering the password 173
–Deleting the password 173
–Forgotten passwords 173
Returning the navigation system to the
default or factory settings 174
–Setting items to be deleted 175
Appendix
Troubleshooting 177
Messages and how to react to them 182
Messages for audio functions 183
Positioning technology 186
–Positioning by GPS 186
–Positioning by “Dead Reckoning”186
–How do GPS and “Dead Reckoning”
work together? 186
Handling large errors 187
–When positioning by GPS is
impossible 187
–Conditions likely to cause noticeable
positioning errors 188
Route setting information 189
–Route search specifications 189
Handling and care of discs 191
–Built-in drive and care 191
–Ambient conditions for playing a
disc 191
Playable discs 192
–DVD-Video and CD 192
–AVCHD recorded discs 192
–Playing DualDisc 192
–Dolby Digital 192
–DTS sound 192
Detailed information for playable media 193
–Compatibility 193
–Media compatibility chart 196
Bluetooth 200
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 200
HD Radio Technology 200
SD and SDHC logo 201
WMA 201
DivX 201
AAC 201
Detailed information regarding connectable
iPods 201
–iPod 202
–iPhone 202
–iTunes 202
Using the LCD screen correctly 202
–Handling the LCD screen 202
–Liquid crystal display (LCD)
screen 203
–Maintaining the LCD screen 203
–LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight 203
Display information 204
–Destination Menu 204
–Phone Menu 204
–Settings Menu 205
–Shortcut menu 207
–DVD Setup 208
Glossary 209
Specifications 212
Contents
En
8
Information to User
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and (2) this device must accept any inter-
ference received, including interference that
may cause undesired operation.
Alteration or modifications carried out without
appropriate authorization may invalidate the
user’s right to operate the equipment.
FCC ID : AJDK020
MODEL NO. : AVIC-X910BT
IC : 775E-K020
FCC ID : AJDK020
MODEL NO. : AVIC-X710BT
IC : 775E-K020
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC Rules
and RSS-Gen of IC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) this device
may not cause interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired operation of
this device.
MADE IN CHINA
For Canadian model
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
This transmitter must not be co-located or op-
erated in conjunction with any other antenna
or transmitter.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
equipment and meets the FCC radio frequency
(RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supplement C to
OET65. This equipment has very low levels of
RF energy that it deemed to comply without
maximum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-
stalled and operated with at least 20cm and
more between the radiator and person’s body
(excluding extremities: hands, wrists, feet and
ankles).
CAUTION:
USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PER-
FORMANCE OF PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN
HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE.
CAUTION:
THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH
THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HA-
ZARD.
WARNING
Handling the cord on this product or cords asso-
ciated with accessories sold with the product will
expose you to chemicals listed on proposition 65
known to the State of California and other govern-
mental entities to cause cancer and birth defect
or other reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
Introduction
En 9
Chapter
01
Introduction
License Agreement
PIONEER AVIC-X910BT, AVIC-
X710BT- for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDI-
TIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BE-
FORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON
THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE
SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER
PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY
THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY
THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER( S) (“SUPPLIERS”),
AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS COV-
ERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’SEPARATE
TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS
AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS,
PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS
(INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE
AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
1 GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to
derive the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
other means. You shall not use the Software to
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
Introduction
En
10
Chapter
01
3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPEN-
DITURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS
IN CONNECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS
OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULT-
ING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ANY AND ALL CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVI-
DUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CON-
TRACT, BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLI-
GENCE, STRICT LIABILITY,
MISREPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS.
IF PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside the United States except as
authorized and as permitted by the laws and
regulations of the United States. If the Soft-
ware has been rightfully obtained by you out-
side of the United States, you agree that you
will not re-export the Software nor any other
technical data received from Pioneer, nor the
direct product thereof, except as permitted by
the laws and regulations of the United States
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
5 TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6 U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on be-
half of the United States government or any
other entity seeking or applying rights similar
to those customarily claimed by the United
States government, the Data is licensed with
“Limited Rights”. Utilization of the Software is
subject to the restrictions specified in the
“Rights in Technical Data”clause at DFARS
252.227-7013, or the equivalent clause for non-
defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA)
Inc., 2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA
90810.
7 MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the State of California. If
any provision of this Agreement is declared in-
valid or unenforceable, the remaining provi-
sions of this Agreement shall remain in full
force and effect.
Introduction
En 11
Chapter
01
Introduction
PIONEER AVIC-X910BT, AVIC-
X710BT- for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN
YOU, AS THE END USER, AND PIONEER
ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
(“PIONEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND
CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT CARE-
FULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE IN-
STALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY
USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT. THE SOFTWARE INCLUDES A DATA-
BASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUPPLIER
(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE
DATABASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’
SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE ATTACHED
TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 14). IF
YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE
TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE PIONEER PRO-
DUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND
ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5)
DAYS OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO
THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF
THE SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE
YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE AGREE-
MENT.
1 GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non
exclusive license to use the software installed
on the Pioneer products (the “Software”) and
the related documentation solely for your own
personal use or for internal use by your busi-
ness, only on such Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate,
port, modify or make derivative works of the
Software. You shall not loan, rent, disclose,
publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market
or otherwise transfer the Software or use it in
any manner not expressly authorized by this
agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to
derive, the source code or structure of all or
any portion of the Software by reverse engi-
neering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
other means. You shall not use the Software to
operate a service bureau or for any other use
involving the processing of data for other per-
sons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copy-
right, trade secret, patent and other proprie-
tary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be cop-
ied, even if modified or merged with other pro-
ducts. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend con-
tained in or on the Software.
You may transfer all of your license rights in
the Software, the related documentation and a
copy of this License Agreement to another
party, provided that the party reads and agrees
to accept the terms and conditions of this Li-
cense Agreement.
2 DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are
provided to you “AS IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LI-
CENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provisions 2
and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be col-
lectively referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND
YOU RECEIVE NO WARRANTY FOR THE SOFT-
WARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-
ITY AND FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR
PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE EX-
PRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT
ALLOW EXCLUSION OF IMPLIED WARRAN-
TIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION MAY NOT
APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and
may contain some nonconformities, defects or
errors. Pioneer does not warrant that the Soft-
ware will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free
or uninterrupted, or that all non-conformities
can or will be corrected. Furthermore, Pioneer
does not make any representations or warran-
ties regarding the use or results of the use of
the Software in terms of its accuracy, reliability
or otherwise.
Introduction
En
12
Chapter
01
3 LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DAMAGES, CLAIM OR LOSS IN-
CURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIM-
ITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL,
INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR
EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST PROFITS, LOST
SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDITURES, IN-
VESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CON-
NECTION WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF
ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES) RESULTING
FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS
BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF, OR SHOULD
HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF
SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES
TO ALL CAUSES OF ACTION IN THE AGGRE-
GATE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION
BREACH OF CONTRACT, BREACH OF WAR-
RANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF
PIONEER’S WARRANTY DISCLAIMER OR
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN THIS
AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE
OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE THAT
PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED
FIFTY PERCENT (50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY
YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIONEER PRO-
DUCT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or lim-
itation of incidental or consequential da-
mages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer
and limitation of liability shall not be applic-
able to the extent that they are prohibited by
any applicable federal, state or local law which
provides that such a disclaimer or limitation
cannot be waived or preempted.
4 EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software
nor any other technical data received from
Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, will be
exported outside Canada except as authorized
and as permitted by the laws and regulations
of Canada. If the Software has been rightfully
obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree
that you will not re-export the Software nor any
other technical data received from Pioneer,
nor the direct product thereof, except as per-
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada
and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
5 TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated.
You may terminate it at any time by destroying
the Software. The Agreement also will termi-
nate if you do not comply with any terms or
conditions of this Agreement. Upon such ter-
mination, you agree to destroy the Software.
6 MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer
and you regarding its subject matter. No
change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer
retailers do not have the authority to change
this Agreement. This Agreement shall be gov-
erned by and construed in accordance with
the internal laws of the Province of Ontario
and the federal laws of Canada applicable
therein. If any provision of this Agreement is
declared invalid or unenforceable, the remain-
ing provisions of this Agreement shall remain
in full force and effect.
Introduction
En 13
Chapter
01
Introduction
Terms and Conditions for the
Tele Atlas Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREE-
MENT”) BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND
TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC. (“Tele
Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE
ATLAS DATA, YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS
AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREEMENT.
1Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-
exclusive license to use the map data and
business points of interest information (the
“POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained on
these discs, solely for personal, non-commer-
cial use and not to operate a service bureau or
for any other use involving the processing of
data of other persons or entities. You may
make one (1) copy of the Data for archival or
backup purposes only but you may not other-
wise copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative
works, derive the structure of or reverse engi-
neer the Data. The Data contains confidential
and proprietary information and materials,
and may contain trade secrets, so you agree to
hold the Data in confidence and in trust and
not to disclose the Data or any portions in any
form, including by renting, leasing, publish-
ing, leasing, sublicensing or transferring the
Data to any third party. You are prohibited
from removing or obscuring any copyright, tra-
demark notice or restrictive legend.
2Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its li-
censors and they retain all ownership rights in
the Data. You agree not to alter, remove, oblit-
erate, or obscure any copyright notice or pro-
prietary legend contained in or on the Data.
3Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS”AND
“WITH ALL FAULTS BASIS”AND TELE ATLAS
AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM
ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IN-
CLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF NON-INFRINGEMENT, MER-
CHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, AC-
CURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. NO ORAL OR WRIT-
TEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EM-
PLOYEES OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS
SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU ARE
NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH AD-
VICE OR INFORMATION. THIS DISCLAIMER
OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL CONDI-
TION OF THE AGREEMENT.
4Limitation of Liability.
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY DA-
MAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT,
INCLUDING LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF
COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSINESS INTER-
RUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POS-
SIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITH-
STANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL
HAVE NO MONETARY LIABILITY TO YOU FOR
ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF
ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS
AGREEMENT.
5Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately
and automatically, without notice, if you
breach any term of this Agreement. You agree
that in the event of termination of the Agree-
ment, you shall return the Data (including all
documentation and all copies) to Tele Atlas
and its suppliers.
Introduction
En
14
Chapter
01
6Indemnity.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele
Atlas, its Licensors, and its Suppliers (includ-
ing their respective licensors, suppliers, as-
signees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies,
and the respective officers, directors, employ-
ees, shareholders, agents and representatives)
free and harmless from and against any liabili-
ty, loss, injury (including injuries resulting in
death), demand, action, cost, expense, or
claim of any kind or character, including but
not limited to attorney’s fees, arising out of or
in connection with any use or possession by
you of the Data.
7U.S. Government Rights.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of the United States Government, or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then use, duplication, reproduc-
tion, release, modification, disclosure or trans-
fer of this commercial product and
accompanying documentation, is restricted in
accordance with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED
rights as described in DFARS 252.227-7014(a)
(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer
software definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD
policy on commercial computer software),
FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-
puter software clause for civilian agencies),
DFARS 252.227-7015 (NOV 1995) (DOD techni-
cal data –commercial items clause); FAR
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (ci-
vilian agency technical data and noncommer-
cial computer software clause); and/or FAR
12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item ac-
quisitions), as applicable. In case of conflict
between any of the FAR and DFARS provisions
listed herein and this License, the construc-
tion that provides greater limitations on the
Government’s rights shall control. Contractor/
manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America,
Inc., 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-
1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330. The Data is
©1984-2009 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RE-
SERVED. For purpose of any public disclosure
provision under any federal, state or local law,
it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and
a proprietary commercial product and not sub-
ject to disclosure.
If you are an agency, department, or other en-
tity of any State government, the United States
Government or any other public entity or
funded in whole or in part by the United States
Government, then you hereby agree to protect
the Data from public disclosure and to consid-
er the Data exempt from any statute, law, regu-
lation, or code, including any Sunshine Act,
Public Records Act, Freedom of Information
Act, or equivalent, which permits public ac-
cess and/or reproduction or use of the Data.
In the event that such exemption is challenged
under any such laws, this Agreement shall be
considered breached and any and all right to
retain any copies or to use of the Data shall be
terminated and considered immediately null
and void. Any copies of the Data held by you
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of
competent jurisdiction considers this clause
void and unenforceable, in whole or in part,
for any reason, this Agreement shall be con-
sidered terminated and null and void, in its en-
tirety, and any and all copies of the Data shall
immediately be destroyed.
8Additional Provisions with respect to
POI Data only.
aNo Creation of Mailing Lists.
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to
create mailing lists or (ii) for other such si-
milar uses.
bCompliance.
You will use the POIs in compliance with all
applicable federal, state and local laws,
rules and regulations.
cIndemnification.
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc.
harmless against all third party claims or
liability which are based in whole or in part
of the users failure to comply with such
laws, rules and regulations or which result
from the use of the POIs through you.
dWarranty.
Introduction
En 15
Chapter
01
Introduction
In addition to the Warranties contained in
the Agreement, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT
THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS IS”
BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES
MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
ePOIs Segregation.
You are prohibited from combining or mer-
ging the POIs with any other POI data. The
POIs shall be maintained in such a way
that they are separately identifiable from all
other POI data at all times.
9Agreement in English.
The parties hereto confirm that they have re-
quested that this Agreement and all attach-
ments and related documents be drafted in
English.
Les parties ont exigé que le présent contrat et
tous les documents attachés soient rédigés en
Anglais.
10 Miscellaneous.
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement
between Tele Atlas and you regarding its sub-
ject matter. Nothing in this Agreement shall
create a joint venture, partnership or principal-
agent relationship between Tele Atlas and you.
The internal laws of California shall govern
this Agreement and you consent to the juris-
diction of the Northern District of California or
the State of California for the County of Santa
Clara. Sections 2 –10 shall survive the expira-
tion or termination of this Agreement. This
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modi-
fied only by Tele Atlas. You may not assign any
part of this Agreement without Tele Atlas’prior
written consent. You acknowledge and under-
stand that the Data may be subject to restric-
tions on exportation and agree to comply with
any applicable export laws. In the event that
any provision or part of a provision of this
Agreement is determined to be invalid, illegal,
or unenforceable, such provision or part there-
of shall be stricken from this Agreement and
the remainder of this Agreement shall be
valid, legal, and enforceable to the maximum
extent possible. Any notice under this Agree-
ment shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas
North America, Inc., Attention Contracts De-
partment, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations un-
dertaken by you herein are intended for the di-
rect benefit of Tele Atlas and may be enforced
by Tele Atlas directly against you.
Licenses
7-Zip
7-Zip
License for use and distribution
7-Zip Copyright (C) 1999-2007 Igor Pavlov.
Licenses for files are:
1 7z.dll: GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction
2 All other files: GNU LGPL
The GNU LGPL + unRAR restriction means
that you must follow both GNU LGPL rules
and unRAR restriction rules.
You can use 7-Zip on any computer, including
a computer in a commercial organization. You
don't need to register or pay for 7-Zip.
GNU LGPL information
This library is free software; you can redistri-
bute it and/or modify it under the terms of the
GNU Lesser General Public License as pub-
lished by the Free Software Foundation; either
version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option)
any later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it
will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY;
without even the implied warranty of MER-
CHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-
LAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
Introduction
En
16
Chapter
01
You should have received a copy of the GNU
Lesser General Public License along with this
library; if not, write to the Free Software Foun-
dation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Bos-
ton, MA 02111-1307 USA
unRAR restriction
The decompression engine for RAR archives
was developed using source code of unRAR
program.
All copyrights to original unRAR code are
owned by Alexander Roshal.
The license for original unRAR code has the
following restriction:
The unRAR sources cannot be used to re-cre-
ate the RAR compression algorithm, which is
proprietary. Distribution of modified unRAR
sources in separate form or as a part of other
software is permitted, provided that it is clearly
stated in the documentation and source com-
ments that the code may not be used to devel-
op a RAR (WinRAR) compatible archiver.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 3, 29 June 2007
Copyright (C) 2007 Free Software Foundation,
Inc. <http://fsf.org/>
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute
verbatim copies of this license document, but
changing it is not allowed.
This version of the GNU Lesser General Public
License incorporates the terms and conditions
of version 3 of the GNU General Public Li-
cense, supplemented by the additional per-
missions listed below.
0 Additional Definitions
As used herein, “this License”refers to version
3 of the GNU Lesser General Public License,
and the “GNU GPL”refers to version 3 of the
GNU General Public License.
“The Library”refers to a covered work gov-
erned by this License, other than an Applica-
tion or a Combined Work as defined below.
An “Application”is any work that makes use of
an interface provided by the Library, but which
is not otherwise based on the Library.
Defining a subclass of a class defined by the
Library is deemed a mode of using an inter-
face provided by the Library.
A“Combined Work”is a work produced by
combining or linking an Application with the
Library. The particular version of the Library
with which the Combined Work was made is
also called the “Linked Version”.
The “Minimal Corresponding Source”for a
Combined Work means the Corresponding
Source for the Combined Work, excluding any
source codefor portions of the Combined
Work that, considered in isolation, are based
on the Application, and not on the Linked Ver-
sion.
The “Corresponding Application Code”for a
Combined Work means the object code and/or
source code for the Application, including any
data and utility programs needed for reprodu-
cing the Combined Work from the Application,
but excluding the System Libraries of the Com-
bined Work.
1 Exception to Section 3 of the GNU GPL.
You may convey a covered work under sec-
tions 3 and 4 of this License without being
bound by section 3 of the GNU GPL.
2 Conveying Modified Versions.
If you modify a copy of the Library, and, in your
modifications, a facility refers to a function or
data to be supplied by an Application that
uses the facility (other than as an argument
passed when the facility is invoked), then you
may convey a copy of the modified version:
a under this License, provided that you make
a good faith effort to ensure that, in the
event an Application does not supply the
function or data, the facility still operates,
and performs whatever part of its purpose
remains meaningful, or
b under the GNU GPL, with none of the addi-
tional permissions of this License applic-
able to that copy.
Introduction
En 17
Chapter
01
Introduction
3 Object Code Incorporating Material
from Library Header Files.
The object code form of an Application may in-
corporate material from a header file that is
part of the Library. You may convey such ob-
ject code under terms of your choice, provided
that, if the incorporated material is not limited
to numerical parameters, data structure lay-
outs and accessors, or small macros, inline
functions and templates (ten or fewer lines in
length), you do both of the following:
a Give prominent notice with each copy of
the object code that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered
by this License.
b Accompany the object code with a copy of
the GNU GPL and this license document.
4 Combined Works.
You may convey a Combined Work under
terms of your choice that, taken together, ef-
fectively do not restrict modification of the por-
tions of the Library contained in the Combined
Work and reverse engineering for debugging
such modifications, if you also do each of the
following:
a Give prominent notice with each copy of
the Combined Work that the Library is used
in it and that the Library and its use are cov-
ered by this License.
b Accompany the Combined Work with a
copy of the GNU GPL and this license doc-
ument.
c For a Combined Work that displays copy-
right notices during execution, include the
copyright notice for the Library among
these notices, as well as a reference direct-
ing the user to the copies of the GNU GPL
and this license document.
d Do one of the following:
1 Convey the Minimal Corresponding
Source under the terms of this License,
and the Corresponding Application
Code in a form suitable for, and under
terms that permit, the user to recombine
or relink the Application with a modified
version of the Linked Version to produce
a modified Combined Work, in the man-
ner specified by section 6 of the GNU
GPL for conveying Corresponding
Source.
2 Use a suitable shared library mechan-
ism for linking with the Library. A suita-
ble mechanism is one that (a) uses at
run time a copy of the Library already
present on the user's computer system,
and (b) will operate properly with a mod-
ified version of the Library that is inter-
face-compatible with the Linked Version.
e Provide Installation Information, but only if
you would otherwise be required to provide
such information under section 6 of the
GNU GPL, and only to the extent that such
information is necessary to install and exe-
cute a modified version of the Combined
Work produced by recombining or relinking
the Application with a modified version of
the Linked Version. (If you use option 4d0,
the Installation Information must accom-
pany the Minimal Corresponding Source
and Corresponding Application Code. If you
use option 4d1, you must provide the Instal-
lation Information in the manner specified
by section 6 of the GNU GPL for conveying
Corresponding Source.)
5 Combined Libraries.
You may place library facilities that are a work
based on the Library side by side in a single li-
brary together with other library facilities that
are not Applications and are not covered by
this License, and convey such a combined li-
brary under terms of yourchoice, if you do
both of the following:
a Accompany the combined library with a
copy of the same work based on the Library,
uncombined with any other library facilities,
conveyed under the terms of this License.
b Give prominent notice with the combined li-
brary that part of it is a work based on the
Library, and explaining where to find the ac-
companying uncombined form of the same
work.
Introduction
En
18
Chapter
01
6 Revised Versions of the GNU Lesser
General Public License.
The Free Software Foundation may publish re-
vised and/or new versions of the GNU Lesser
General Public License from time to time.
Such new versions will be similar in spirit to
the present version, but may differ in detail to
address new problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version
number. If the Library as you received it speci-
fies that a certain numbered version of the
GNU Lesser General Public License “or any
later version”applies to it, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of
that published version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If
the Library as you received it does not specify
a version number of the GNU Lesser General
Public License, you may choose any version of
the GNU Lesser General Public License ever
published by the Free Software Foundation.
If the Library as you received it specifies that a
proxy can decide whether future versions of
the GNU Lesser General Public License shall
apply, that proxy’s public statement of accep-
tance of any version is permanent authoriza-
tion for you to choose that version for the
Library.
7-Zip Source Notice
The software program used in this product
contains 7-Zip library. 7-Zip contains the soft-
ware granted permission for the usage under
the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public Li-
cense. A copy of appropriate source code is
available at customer necessary expense for
the distribution.
Please contact our Customer Support Center
to obtain a copy.For more information on the
GNU Lesser General Public License, visit the
GNU’s website at http://www.gnu.org.
About the database
About the Data for the Map
Database
!Modifications related to roads, streets/high-
ways, terrain, construction and other things
before/during the development period may
not be reflected in this database. Inevitably,
those modifications after that period are
not reflected in this database.
!For more details about the map coverage of
this navigation system, refer to the informa-
tion on our website.
!It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use
any part or the whole of this map in any
form without permission from the copyright
owner.
!If the local traffic regulations or conditions
deviate from this data, follow the local traf-
fic regulations (such as signs, indications,
etc.) and conditions (such as construction,
weather, etc.).
!The traffic regulation data used in the map
database applies only to standard sized
passenger vehicles. Note that regulations
for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other
non-standard vehicles are not included in
the database.
Introduction
En 19
Chapter
01
Introduction
Copyright Notices for North
American data
1) Tele Atlas®MultiNet®North America data.
As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for Tele Atlas®MultiNet®North America is:
NOTICE
©1984 –2009 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved.
This material is proprietary and the subject of
copyright protection and other intellectual
property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas.
Tele Atlas is an authorized distributor of se-
lected Statistics Canada computer files under
Agreement number 6776. The product in-
cludes information copied with permission
from Canadian authorities, including ©Cana-
da Post Corporation and GeoBase®, All rights
reserved. The product is sourced in part from
Geography Division, Statistics Canada, 2006
Road Network File (RNF), 92-500-XWE/XWF.
The incorporation of data sources from Statis-
tics Canada within this product shall not be
construed as constituting an endorsement by
Statistics Canada of such product. The use of
this material is subject to the terms of a Li-
cense Agreement. You will be held liable for
any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this
material.
2) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
for all third-party brand icons (the “Brand
Icons”) are located in the operator’s manual
included in the Licensed Products.
3) As of the Effective Date, the copyright notice
with logo for infoUSA, Inc. is:
Data by
Copyright 2009
All Rights Reserved
C
Powered by NNG
Important Safety Information
WARNING
!Do not attempt to install or service your navi-
gation system by yourself. Installation or servi-
cing of the navigation system by persons
without training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories may
be dangerous and could expose you to the
risk of electric shock or other hazards.
!If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this navigation system, park your vehicle to
safe place and turn the ignition switch off
(ACC OFF) immediately and consult your deal-
er or the nearest authorized Pioneer Service
Station. Do not use the navigation system in
this condition because doing so may result in
a fire, electric shock, or other failure.
!If you notice smoke, a strange noise or odor
from the navigation system, or any other ab-
normal signs on the LCD screen, turn off the
power immediately and consult your dealer or
the nearest authorized Pioneer Service Sta-
tion. Using this navigation system in this con-
dition may result in permanent damage to the
system.
!Do not disassemble or modify this navigation
system, as there are high-voltage components
inside which may cause an electric shock. Be
sure to consult your dealer or the nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station for internal
inspection, adjustments or repairs.
!Do not allow this product to come into contact
with liquids. Electrical shock could result.
Also, damage to the product, smoke, and over-
heating could result from contact with liquids.
Introduction
En
20
Chapter
01
CAUTION
!When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route are automatically
set. Also, for day or time traffic regulations,
only information about traffic regulations ap-
plicable at the time when the route was calcu-
lated is shown. One-way streets and street
closures may not be taken into consideration.
For example, if a street is open during the
morning only, but you arrive later, it would be
against the traffic regulations so you cannot
drive along the set route. When driving, please
follow the actual traffic signs. Also, the system
may not know some traffic regulations.
Before using your navigation system, be sure
to read and fully understand the following
safety information:
pRead the entire manual before operating
this navigation system.
pThe navigation features of your navigation
system (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to
you in the operation of your vehicle. It is
not a substitute for your attentiveness,
judgment, and care when driving.
pDo not operate this navigation system (or
the rear view camera option if purchased) if
doing so will divert your attention in any
way from the safe operation of your vehicle.
Always observe safe driving rules and fol-
low all existing traffic regulations. If you ex-
perience difficulty in operating the system
or reading the display, park your vehicle in
a safe location and apply the parking brake
before making the necessary adjustments.
pNever allow others to use the system un-
less they have read and understood the op-
erating instructions.
pNever use this navigation system to route
to hospitals, police stations or similar facil-
ities in an emergency. Stop using any func-
tions relating to the hands-free phone and
please call 911.
pRoute and guidance information displayed
by this equipment is for reference purposes
only. It may not accurately reflect the latest
permissible routes, road conditions, one
way streets, road closures, or traffic restric-
tions.
pTraffic restrictions and advisories currently
in force should always take precedence
over guidance given by the navigation sys-
tem. Always obey current traffic restric-
tions, even if the navigation system
provides contrary advice.
pFailure to set correct information about the
local time may result in the navigation sys-
tem providing improper routing and gui-
dance instructions.
pNever set the volume of your navigation
system so high that you cannot hear out-
side traffic and emergency vehicles.
pTo promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or
the parking brake is applied.
pThe data encoded in the built-in memory is
the intellectual property of the provider, and
the provider is responsible for such con-
tent.
pKeep this manual handy as a reference for
operating procedures and safety informa-
tion.
pPay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions care-
fully.
pDo not install this navigation system where
it may (i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) im-
pair the performance of any of the vehicle’s
operating systems or safety features, in-
cluding air bags or hazard lamp buttons or
(iii) impair the driver’s ability to safely oper-
ate the vehicle.
pPlease remember to fasten your seat belt at
all times while operating your vehicle. If
you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe if your
seat belt is not properly buckled.
pNever use headphones while driving.
Introduction
En 21
Chapter
01
Introduction
“GOOG-411”sevice
pPioneer does not bear responsibility for the
accuracy of the information.
pPioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided
by related companies, such as cancellation
of services or changing to pay-services.
Also, we do not accept return of the pro-
duct for this reason.
Speed limit indication
The speed limit is based on the map database.
The speed limit in the database may not
match the actual speed limit of the current
road. This is not a definite value. Be sure to
drive according to the actual speed limit.
Additional Safety Information
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-
Video and certain touch key operations) of-
fered by this navigation system could be dan-
gerous and/or unlawful if used while driving.
To prevent such functions from being used
while the vehicle is in motion, there is an inter-
lock system that senses when the parking
brake is set and when the vehicle is moving. If
you attempt to use the functions described
above while driving, they will become disabled
until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and
apply the parking brake. Please keep the brake
pedal pushed down before releasing the park-
ing brake.
WARNING
!LIGHT GREEN LEAD AT POWER CON-
NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT
PARKED STATUS AND MUST BE CON-
NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPLY SIDE
OF THE PARKING BRAKE SWITCH. IM-
PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF
THIS LEAD MAY VIOLATE APPLICABLE
LAW AND MAY RESULT IN SERIOUS IN-
JURY OR DAMAGE.
!To avoid the risk of damage and injury and the
potential violation of applicable laws, the navi-
gation system is not for use with a “Video
image”that is visible to the driver.
!In some countries or states the viewing of
“Video image”on a display inside a vehicle
even by persons other than the driver may be
illegal. Where such regulations apply, they
must be obeyed.
!When applying the parking brake in order to
view “Video image”or to enable other func-
tions offered by the navigation system, park
your vehicle in a safe place, and keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake if the vehicle is parked on a hill
or otherwise might move when releasing the
parking brake.
CAUTION
Accuracy/performance of interlock may be im-
pacted by such factors as GPS signal detection
and driving habits or conditions of the place
where the vehicle is parked.
When you attempt to watch “Video image”
while driving, the warning “Viewing of front
seat video source while driving is strictly
prohibited.”will appear on the screen. To
watch “Video image”on this display, stop the
vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking
brake. Please keep the brake pedal pushed
down before releasing the parking brake.
Introduction
En
22
Chapter
01
When using a display connected
to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT
The video output terminal (REAR MONITOR
OUTPUT) is for connection of a display to en-
able passengers in the rear seats to watch
video images.
WARNING
NEVER install the Rear Display in a location that
enables the driver to watch video images while
driving.
pThis cautionary statements apply to AVIC-
X910BT.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using
this product. Using this product without run-
ning the engine can drain the battery.
WARNING
Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an
ACC position.
Rear view camera
With an optional rear view camera, you are
able to use the navigation system as an aid to
keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight
parking spot.
WARNING
!SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR REVERSED.
!USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR
IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE
MAY RESULT IN INJURY OR DAMAGE.
CAUTION
!For safety reasons, the rear view camera func-
tion is not available until the navigation sys-
tem boots up completely.
!The rear view mode is to use the navigation
system as an aid to keep an eye on the trailers,
or while backing up. Do not use this function
for entertainment purposes.
Notes Before Using the System
Important (Serial Number:)
The serial number of this device is located on the
bottom of this product. For your own security and
convenience, be sure to record this number on
the enclosed warranty card.
Failure to operate
Should the navigation system fail to operate
properly, contact your dealer or nearest
authorized Pioneer Service Station.
After-sales service for Pioneer products
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
which you purchased the product for after-
sales service (including warranty conditions)
or any other information. In case the necessary
information is not available, please contact the
companies listed below.
Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair
without making advance contact.
!U.S.A
Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760
800-421-1404
!CANADA
Pioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc.
CUSTOMER SATISFACTION DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkway Markham, Ontario
L3R 0P2
1-877-283-5901
905-479-4411
For warranty information, please see the Lim-
ited Warranty sheet included with your pro-
duct.
Introduction
En 23
Chapter
01
Introduction
Visit Our Web site
Visit us at the following site:
http://www.pioneerelectronics.com
In Canada
http://www.pioneerelectronics.ca
1 Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to
this information in the event of an insurance
claim such as loss or theft.
2 Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
3 Download owner’s manuals, order product
catalogues, research new products, and
much more.
4 Receive notices of software upgrades and
software updates.
Manual overview
How to use this manual
Finding the operation procedure for
what you want to do
When you have decided what you want to do,
you can find the page you need from the
“Contents”.
Finding the operation procedure from
a menu name
If you want to check the meaning of an item
displayed on the screen, you will find the ne-
cessary page from the “Display information”at
the end of the manual.
Glossary
Use the glossary to find the meanings of
terms.
Terminology
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read
the following information about the conven-
tions used in this manual. Familiarity with
these conventions will help you greatly as you
learn how to use your new equipment.
!Buttons on your navigation system are de-
scribed in ALL CAPITAL,BOLD lettering:
e.g.)
MENU button, MAP button.
!Items in different menus, screen titles, and
functional components are described in
bold with double quotation marks “”:
e.g.)
“Destination Menu”screen or “AV
Source”screen
!Touch panel keys that are available on the
screen are described in bold in brackets [ ]:
e.g.)
[Destination], [Settings].
!Extra information, alternatives and other
notes are presented in the following for-
mat:
e.g.)
pIf the home location has not been stored
yet, set the location first.
!References are indicated like this:
e.g.)
=For details, refer to Setting your home
position on page 154.
Definitions of terminology
“Front Display”and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to
the body of this navigation unit will be referred
to as the “Front Display”. Any additional op-
tional screen that is purchased for use in con-
junction with this navigation unit will be
referred to as the “Rear Display”.
“Video image”
“Video image”in this manual indicates mov-
ing images of DVD-Video, DivXâ, iPod, and any
equipment that is connected to this system
with an RCA cable, such as general-purpose
AV equipment.
Introduction
En
24
Chapter
01
“External storage device (USB, SD)”
The SD memory card, SDHC memory card
and USB memory device are collectively re-
ferred to as the “external storage device (USB,
SD)”. If it indicates the USB memory only, it is
referred to as the “USB storage device”.
Notice regarding video
viewing
Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights
as protected by the Copyright Law.
Notice regarding DVD-
Video viewing
This product incorporates copyright protection
technology that is protected by method claims
of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual
property rights owned by Macrovision
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
intended for home and other limited viewing
uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineering
or disassembly is prohibited.
Notice regarding MP3 file
usage
Supply of this navigation system conveys only
a license for private, non-commercial use and
does not convey a license nor imply any right
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-
enue-generating), real time broadcasting (ter-
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-
tions. An independent license for such use is
required. For details, please visit
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
iPod compatibility
This product supports only the following iPod
models and iPod software versions. Others
may not work correctly.
!iPod nano first generation; Ver. 1.3.1
!iPod nano second generation; Ver. 1.3.1
!iPod nano third generation; Ver. 1.1.3
!iPod nano fourth generation; Ver. 1.0.3
!iPod fifth generation; Ver. 1.3
!iPod classic; Ver. 2.0
!iPod touch first generation; Ver. 2.2
!iPod touch second generation; Ver. 2.2
!iPhone; Ver. 2.2
!iPhone 3G; Ver. 2.2
pIn this manual, iPod and iPhone will be re-
ferred to as iPod.
pWhen you use this navigation system with
a Pioneer USB interface cable for iPod (CD-
IU230V) (sold separately), you can control
an iPod compatible with this navigation
system.
pTo obtain maximum performance, we re-
commend that you use the latest software
for the iPod.
pOperation methods may vary depending on
the iPod models and the software version
of iPod.
Introduction
En 25
Chapter
01
Introduction
pFor more details about iPod compatibility
with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website.
Map coverage
For more details about the map coverage of
this navigation system, refer to the information
on our website.
Protecting the LCD panel
and screen
pDo not allow direct sunlight to fall on the
LCD screen when this product is not being
used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight
can result in LCD screen malfunction due
to the resulting high temperatures.
pWhen using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video in the form of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
pTo protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch panel keys with
your finger and gently touch the screen.
Notes on internal memory
Before removing the vehicle
battery
If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the memory will be erased and must be repro-
gramed.
pSome data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the default or factory set-
tings before you operate this function.
=For more detailed information about the
items which would be erased, refer to
Returning the navigation system to the
default or factory settings on page 174.
Data subject to erasure
The information is erased by pressing the
RESET button or disconnecting the yellow lead
from the battery (or removing the battery it-
self). However, some items remain.
pSome data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the default or factory set-
tings before you operate this function.
=For more detailed information about the
items which would be erased, refer to
Returning the navigation system to the
default or factory settings on page 174.
Resetting the microprocessor
CAUTION
Pressing the RESET button clears the settings for
the AV source without clearing all the navigation
function items. Please refer to the related section
before clearing.
=For more detailed information about the items
which would be erased, refer to Returning the
navigation system to the default or factory set-
tings on page 174.
The microprocessor must be reset under the
following conditions:
!Prior to using this product for the first time
after installation.
!If the product fails to operate properly.
!If there appear to be problems with the op-
eration of the system.
!When changing the combination of equip-
ment.
!When adding/removing additional pro-
ducts that connect to the navigation sys-
tem.
!If your vehicle position is shown on the
map with a significant positioning error.
1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Introduction
En
26
Chapter
01
2 Press the RESET button with a pen tip
or other pointed implement.
RESET button
pIf you have connected other equipment to
this navigation system with IP-BUS, be sure
to reset that equipment too.
Introduction
En 27
Chapter
01
Introduction
Checking part names and functions
This chapter gives information about the
names of the parts and the main features
using the buttons.
1Disc loading slot
Insert a disc to play.
=For details concerning operations, refer
to Inserting and ejecting a disc on the
next page.
2LCD screen
3EJECT button
4RESET button
=For details concerning operations, refer
to Resetting the microprocessor on page
26.
5MENU button
Press the MENU button to display the “Top
Menu”.
Press and hold the button when the “Top
Menu”is displayed. The “Screen Calibra-
tion”screen appears.
=For details concerning operations, refer
to Adjusting the response positions of the
touch panel (touch panel calibration) on
page 157.
6MAP button
Press to view the map screen.
Press and hold to display the “Picture Ad-
justment”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer
to Adjusting the screen brightness on
page 157.
7MULTI-CONTROL
Rotating;
Adjusts the AV (Audio and Video) source vo-
lume.
Moving upward or downward once;
Changes the map scale one step at a time.
1234
5
6
7
8
9
a
Basic operation
En
28
Chapter
02
Keep moving upward or downward;
Changes the map scale continuously.
pThis operation is available only while the
map screen is displayed.
Moving MULTI-CONTROL to the left or
right;
Allows you to change the frequency one
step at a time; operates track search con-
trols.
Keep moving MULTI-CONTROL to the
left or right;
Allows you to perform manual seek tuning,
fast forward or reverse.
Pressing the center of MULTI-CONTROL;
Enables you to start the voice operation
when “English”is selected in “Program lan-
guage:”. (When a language other than
“English”is selected, pressing the center al-
lows you to hear the previous route gui-
dance.)
pWhen your phone is paired to the naviga-
tion system, press the center of the mul-
ticontrol to answer an incoming call or
end the phone call.
Keep pressing the center of MULTI-CON-
TROL;
Mutes the AV (Audio and Video) source. To
cancel the muting, press and hold it again.
8Bluetooth connection status indicator
Lights up when your phone is paired to the
navigation system by Bluetooth wireless
technology.
9“AV2”input jack
This is the “AV2”input terminal. Use the
CD-RM10 (sold separately) to connect the
external video component.
pTo connect your iPod by using USB inter-
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V), use
“AV1”input (RCA) on the back of the
unit.
aSD card slot
=For more detailed information, refer to In-
serting and ejecting an SD memory card
on this page.
Inserting and ejecting a disc
Inserting a disc
%Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.
pDo not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
Ejecting a disc
%Press the EJECT button.
The disc is ejected.
Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card
CAUTION
!Keep the dummy SD card out of the reach of
small children to prevent them from acciden-
tally swallowing it.
!To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
!If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
Basic operation
En 29
Chapter
02
Basic operation
Inserting an SD memory card
%Insert an SD memory card into the SD
card slot.
Insert it with the contact surface facing to the
left and press the card until it clicks and com-
pletely locks.
pThis system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
pCompatibility with all SD memory cards is
not guaranteed.
pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some SD memory cards.
pDo not insert anything other than SD mem-
ory cards or dummy SD cards into the SD
card slot.
Ejecting an SD memory card
1 Press the SD memory card until it clicks.
The SD memory card is ejected.
2 Pull out the SD memory card.
pInsert the dummy SD card to keep the SD
card slot free of dust when the SD memory
card is not inserted.
Plugging and unplugging a
USB storage device
CAUTION
!To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
!If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
!Never remove the USB storage device immedi-
ately after plugging it. It may cause that the
navigation system cannot recognize the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD).
Plugging in a USB storage device
%Plug a USB storage device into the USB
connector.
USB connector
USB storage device
pCompatibility with all USB storage device is
not guaranteed.
This navigation system may not achieve op-
timum performance with some USB sto-
rage devices.
pConnection via USB hub is not possible.
Unplugging a USB storage device
%Pull out the USB storage device after
checking that no data is being accessed.
Basic operation
En
30
Chapter
02
Connecting and
disconnecting an iPod
CAUTION
!To prevent data loss and damage to the sto-
rage device, never remove it from this naviga-
tion system while data is being transferred.
!If data loss or corruption occurs on the sto-
rage device for any reason, it is usually not
possible to recover the data. Pioneer accepts
no liability for damages, costs or expenses
arising from data loss or corruption.
Connecting your iPod
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
pA USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)
(sold separately) is required for connection.
1 Pull out the USB storage device after
checking that no data is being accessed.
To AV input on the back of the navigation system
USB connector USB interface cable for
iPod
pFor more details about iPod compatibility
with this navigation system, refer to the in-
formation on our website.
pConnection via USB hub is not possible.
2 Connect your iPod.
Disconnecting your iPod
%Pull out the USB interface cable for iPod
after checking that no data is being ac-
cessed.
Flow from startup to
termination
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the rear view camera function
is not available until the navigation system boots
up completely.
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the navigation splash
screen comes on for a few seconds.
2 Turn off the vehicle engine to termi-
nate the system.
The navigation system is also turned off.
On first-time startup
When you use the navigation system for the
first time, select the language that you want to
use.
1 Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the navigation splash
screen comes on for a few seconds.
2 Touch the language that you want to
use on the screen.
Basic operation
En 31
Chapter
02
Basic operation
3 Touch the language that you want to
use for the voice guidance.
The navigation system will now restart.
4 Touch [Destination] to display Destina-
tion menu.
The disclaimer appears. Read the disclaimer
carefully, checking its details, and then touch
[OK] if you agree to the conditions.
The “Destination Menu”appears.
pWhen the system boots up, the vehicle’s an-
tenna may extend or turn on depending on
the setting. To retract the antenna, turn the
ignition switch off.
=For details, refer to Switching the auto an-
tenna setting on page 164.
Regular startup
CAUTION
For safety reasons, the rear view camera function
is not available until the navigation system boots
up completely.
%Start the engine to boot up the system.
After a short pause, the navigation splash
screen comes on for a few seconds.
pThe screen shown will differ depending on
the previous conditions.
pIf the navigation screen was shown pre-
viously, the disclaimer appears.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
pIf other screens were shown previously, the
disclaimer screen will be skipped.
pIf the anti-theft function is activated, you
must enter your password. After unlocking
the navigation system, the “Top Menu”ap-
pears. If you enter the navigation screen
first, the disclaimer screen will appear.
Read the disclaimer carefully, checking its
details, and then touch [OK] if you agree to
the conditions.
Basic operation
En
32
Chapter
02
Basic operation
En 33
Chapter
02
Basic operation
How to use the navigation menu screens
Screen switching overview
2
5
78
6
1
34
Basic operation
En
34
Chapter
02
What you can do on each menu
1Top Menu
Press the MENU button to display the “Top
Menu”.
This is the starting menu to access the desired
screens and operate the various functions.
2Destination Menu
You can search for your destination on this
menu. You can also check or cancel your set
route from this menu.
p[MSN Direct] is available for AVIC-
X910BT only.
3Contacts screen
You can access the list of contacts to call up
an entry.
=For details, refer to Using hands-free
phoning.
4AV Source menu
You can access the screen for selecting the
audio and visual source to play.
5Phone Menu
You can access the screen that is related to
hands-free phoning to see call histories and
change the settings on the Bluetooth wireless
technology connection.
6Settings Menu
You can access the screen to customize set-
tings.
7Map screen
Press the MAP button to display the naviga-
tion map screen.
8AV operation screen
This is the screen that normally appears when
you play the AV source. Touching the icon on
the top left corner displays the “AV Source”
menu.
pTo return to the previous screen, touch
.
Displaying the rear view
camera image
[RearView] can be displayed the full-screen
rear view camera image. [RearView] is useful
if you want to monitor an attached trailer, etc.
=For details, refer to Setting the rear view
camera on page 156.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”, and then touch [Settings].
2 Touch [System Settings] and then touch
[Back Camera].
3 Touch [On] next to “Camera”to acti-
vate the camera setting.
4 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”and then touch [AV Source].
5 Touch [RearView] on the “AV Source”
menu.
Basic operation
En 35
Chapter
02
Basic operation
How to use the map
Most of the information provided by your navigation system can be seen on the map. You need to be-
come familiar with how information appears on the map.
How to read the map screen
This example shows an example of a 2D map screen.
23 4
5
6
7
8
9
a
bcde
f
g
h
1
pInformation with the mark (*) appears only
when the route is set.
pDepending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
1Next direction of travel*
When you approach a guidance point, this ap-
pears in green. Touching this item enables
you to hear the previous guidance again.
pFor more information about the direc-
tion symbol, refer to Supplemental infor-
mation about directions on page 190.
2Distance to the guidance point*
Shows the distance to the next guidance
point.
3Name of the street to be used (or next gui-
dance point)*
4Current time
5Compass
The red arrow indicates north.
6Map mode selector
=For details, refer to Switching the map
mode on page 38.
7Shortcut to the
“Map Confirmation Screen”
Touching this shortcut enables the screen to
switch to the “Map Confirmation Screen”di-
rectly with the current position or the cursor
position centered.
=For details, refer to What you can do with
the “Map Confirmation Screen”on page
54.
8Stop key for the dummy run
Basic operation
En
36
Chapter
02
This key will be displayed while you activate
the dummy run (“Fly over”or “Demo
Mode”). Touch the key to cancel the dummy
run.
=For details, refer to Demo Mode on
page 149.
=For details, refer to Playing simulated tra-
vel at high speed on page 60.
9Album artwork on iPod
If you connect your iPod to this navigation sys-
tem, the artwork for the album that is playing
appears.
aShortcut to the AV operation screen
The AV Source currently selected is shown.
Touching the indicator displays the AV opera-
tion screen of the current source directly.
bExtension tab for the AV information bar
Touching this tab opens the AV information
bar and enables you to briefly view the current
status on the AV source. Touching it again re-
tracts the bar.
cCurrent route*
The route currently set is highlighted in bright
color on the map. If a waypoint is set on the
route, the route after the next waypoint is
highlighted in another color.
dCurrent position
Indicates the current location of your vehicle.
The apex of the triangular mark indicates your
orientation and the display moves automati-
cally as you drive.
pThe apex of the triangular mark is the
proper current position.
eStreet name (or city name) that your vehi-
cle is traveling along
fMulti-Info window
Shows the value on the items selected on
“Displayed Info”. Touching this area allows
you to display the “Route Information”
screen.
=For details, refer to Displayed Info on
page 146.
=For details, refer to Checking the current
route conditions on page 59.
pThis item is not shown when “Full
Screen Map”is set to “On”.
=For details, refer to Map Settings on
page 145.
pThe estimated time of arrival is an ideal
value that the navigation system com-
putes internally as the route is calcu-
lated. The estimated time of arrival
should be read just as a reference value,
and does not guarantee arrival at the
time indicated.
gMap scale
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.
hSecond Maneuver Arrow*
Shows the turning direction after next and the
distance to there.
pThis item is not shown when “Full
Screen Map”is set to “On”.
=For details, refer to Map Settings on
page 145.
Meaning of guidance flags
: Destination
The checkered flag indicates your
destination.
: Waypoint
The yellow flags indicate your way-
points.
: Start point
The bright green flag indicates
your start point.
Signpost and recommended lane
Signposts will appear together with the recom-
mended lane where multi-lane roads exist
when you are driving on your route. The high-
lighted lane indicates the recommended lane.
Basic operation
En 37
Chapter
02
Basic operation
pThis information is based on the map data-
base. Thus, the information may differ from
actual conditions. Use it as just a direc-
tional reference for your driving.
Note regarding the route highlighted
in purple
pA route highlighted in purple on the map
indicates that your route includes a road
not matching your preference on the fol-
lowing settings in “Route”;“Unpaved
Roads”,“Highways”,“Ferries”,“U-turns”,
“Permit Needed”,“Toll Roads”.
For your safety, please review and obey all
local traffic rules along the highlighted
route.
Switching the map mode
There are a number of map displays.
Touching the map mode selector allows you to
change the map display.
Map mode selector
2D map screen (Heading up mode)
The map display always shows the vehicle’s di-
rection as proceeding toward the top of the
screen.
When “Heading up”mode is selected, is
displayed.
2D map screen (North up mode)
The map display always has north at the top of
the screen.
When “North up”mode is selected, is dis-
played.
3D map screen
When the 3D map screen is selected, is
displayed.
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
2 Touch the map mode selector to switch
the map display.
Each touch of the map mode selector changes
the map display as follows:
2D map screen (Heading up mode) —2D map
screen (North up mode) —3D map screen
Changing the scale of the map
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
Basic operation
En
38
Chapter
02
2 Move MULTI-CONTROL down or up to
zoom in or out.
Moving MULTI-CONTROL upward or down-
ward once allows you to change the map
scale one step at a time. Holding MULTI-CON-
TROL while moving it up or down allows you
to change the scale sequentially.
pZooming out will reduce the size of the icon
and further zooming out will hide it. How-
ever, the pin-shaped icon is not resized and
keeps displayed.
pFurther zooming out hides the lines of traf-
fic information.
Scrolling the map to the
position you want to see
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
2 Switch to the 2D map screen.
=For details, refer to Switching the map mode
on the previous page.
3 Touch the map briefly.
Briefly touching the position on the map that
you want to see positions the cursor there.
Cursor
Positioning the cursor to the desired location
results in a brief informational overview about
the location being displayed at the bottom of
screen, with street name and other informa-
tion for this location being shown. (The infor-
mation shown varies depending on the
position.)
4 Touch and drag the map in the desired
direction to scroll.
Dragging the map scrolls it. The scrolling in-
crement depends on your dragging length.
pPressing the MAP button returns the map
to the current position.
Changing the tilt and rotation
angle of the map
On the 3D map screen, briefly touching the
map shows the tilt controls and rotation angle.
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
2 Switch to the 3D map screen.
=For details, refer to Switching the map mode
on the previous page.
Basic operation
En 39
Chapter
02
Basic operation
3 Touch anywhere on the map briefly to
show the tilt controls and rotation angle.
Controls for tilt and rotation angle
pTouching hides the tilt controls and rota-
tion angle.
4 Touch the controls to adjust the tilt and
rotation angle.
The basic flow of creating
your route
1Park your vehicle in a safe place, and apply
the parking brake.
j
2Display the “Destination Menu”.
j
3Select the method of searching for your
destination.
j
4Enter information about the destination
and narrow down candidates to one.
j
5Touch [Go Here Now] on the “Map Confir-
mation Screen”.
j
6The navigation system calculates the route
to your destination, and then shows the
route on the map.
j
7After releasing the parking brake, drive in
accordance with navigation guidance.
Operating list screens (e.g.
city list)
12
45
3
1Screen title
The screen title appears.
Basic operation
En
40
Chapter
02
2Current page/total pages
3
Returns the previous screen.
4
Touching or on the scroll bar scrolls
through the list and allows you to view the re-
maining items.
5Listed items
Touching an item on the list allows you to nar-
row down the options and proceed to the next
operation.
Operating the on-screen
keyboard
12 3456
789a
1Text box
Displays the characters that are entered. If
there is no text in the box, an informative
guide with text appears.
2Screen title
The screen title appears.
3Keyboard
Touch the keys to enter the characters.
4Number of possible choices
5
Returns the previous screen.
6:
Deletes the input text one letter at a time, be-
ginning at the end of the text. Continuing to
touch the button deletes all of the text.
7Caps lock control
Switches the keyboard between lowercase let-
ters and uppercase letters.
Each touch of [aA] changes the setting as fol-
lows:
—enables you to capitalize the first
letter of a word.
—enables you to enter letters in
lower-case. (When a space is entered, it
switches automatically.)
—enables you to enter letters with
capitals (caps) lock.
8[@/!]:
Displays the key to enter special characters,
such as [!].
pThe appearance of this key and typeable
characters change according to the cur-
rent keyboard layout.
9[Keys]
Switches the on-screen keyboard layout.
a[Done]
Confirms the entry and allows you to proceed
to the next step.
Basic operation
En 41
Chapter
02
Basic operation
CAUTION
For safety reasons, these route-setting functions
are not available while your vehicle is in motion.
To enable these functions, you must stop in a
safe place and put on the parking brake before
setting your route.
pSome information regarding traffic regula-
tions depends on the time when the route
calculation is performed. Thus, the infor-
mation may not correspond with a certain
traffic regulation when your vehicle actually
passes through the location in question.
Also, the information on the traffic regula-
tions provided will be for a passenger vehi-
cle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic
regulations when driving.
Searching for a location by
address
The most frequently used function is [Ad-
dress], in which the address is specified and
the destination is searched.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”.
2 Touch [Address].
3 Touch the key next to “Country:”to dis-
play the country list.
4 Touch one of the items on the list to set
the country as search area.
The screen returns to the previous screen.
Searching for and selecting a location
En
42
Chapter
03
5 Touch the key next to “State:”and
touch the desired state, province, or terri-
tory on the list.
The screen returns to the previous screen.
6 Touch the key next to “City:”to enter
the city name.
7 Enter the city name or Zip code.
!When the options are narrowed down to six
or less, those are automatically listed.
!If you want to list the options matching to
the current information entered, touch
[Done].
!Touching [History] displays the list of cities
that you selected before.
8 Touch the desired city name.
!When a city is already set, touching [City
Center] allows you to select the representa-
tive location of the city and proceed to the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
9 Enter the street name and touch the de-
sired one from the list.
!When a street is already set, touching
[Street Center] allows you to select the re-
presentative point of the street and proceed
to the “Map Confirmation Screen”.
!When a street is already set, touching [In-
tersection] allows you to search for an in-
tersection. After entering the second street
name and selecting the desired intersec-
tion, the “Map Confirmation Screen”ap-
pears. This is useful when you don’t know
the house number or cannot input the
house number of the selected street.
10 Enter the house number and then
touch [Done].
!If the house number you have entered is
not found, a message appears. In that case,
a house number near entered one is se-
lected after touching [OK].
Searching for and selecting a location
En 43
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
11 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
If only one option is appropriate for your entry,
the screen will jump to the
“Map Confirmation Screen”directly and the pro-
cess of entering the street name or house num-
ber will be skipped. If you do not want that
location, touch to retry with another ad-
dress.
Searching for the vicinity
Points of Interest (POI)
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, parking
lots or restaurants, is available. You can
search for a POI by selecting the category (or
entering the POI Name).
Searching for POIs around the
cursor
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Around Cursor].
3 Drag the map to move the cursor to the
desired position and touch [OK].
The number of nearby POIs will appear at the
bottom of the screen.
4 Touch the category you want.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, repeat this step as many
times as necessary.
Touch [Search] to search for a POI by entering
the POI name in the selected category.
Touching [All] lists all POIs that are included
in the categories currently displayed.
Searching for and selecting a location
En
44
Chapter
03
5 Touch the POI you want.
!Touching the [Name] tab sorts the options
in the list in alphabetical order.
!Touching the [Distance] tab sorts the op-
tions in the list in order by distance.
pIcons are helpful for quickly telling the cate-
gory of facilities with the same name.
6 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
pSearching for a spot and touching [Info]on
the “Map Confirmation Screen”also allows
you to search for nearby POIs around the
cursor.
=For details, refer to Viewing information
about a specified location on page 56.
Searching for a nearby POI
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Around Current GPS Location].
The list of POI categories appears.
=For the subsequent operations, refer to
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the
previous page.
Searching for POIs along the
current route
pThis function is available when the route is
set.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Along Route].
The list of POI categories appears.
=For the subsequent operations, refer to
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the
previous page.
Searching for POIs around the
destination
pThis function is available when the route is
set.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Around Destination].
The list of POI categories appears.
=For the subsequent operations, refer to
Searching for POIs around the cursor on the
previous page.
Searching for POIs around the
address
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Around entered address].
Searching for and selecting a location
En 45
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
3 Enter the address you want.
=For details, refer to Searching for a location
by address on page 42.
4 Touch the category you want.
=For the subsequent operations, refer to
Searching for POIs around the cursor on
page 44.
Using “Saved Criteria”
Storing your selection sequence
You can store the selected search method and
one of the categories as a shortcut to recall it
later. It allows you to search for a POI in the
same way as you did before. You can also de-
lete the shortcuts.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Register Search Criteria].
3 Touch one of the items on the list.
!Selecting an item that has already been
stored allows you to overwrite it.
4 Touch the search method that you
want to put into memory.
The list of POI categories appears.
5 Touch the category that you want to
put into memory.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, select the desired category
from the list repeatedly until your desired cate-
gory appears.
Your selection sequence is shown on the top
of the screen.
6 Recheck the sequence and touch [Save
Criteria] to put it into memory.
Searching for and selecting a location
En
46
Chapter
03
!Touching [Save Criteria] without selecting
a category allows you to store only your se-
lected search method including all cate-
gories.
!If there aren’t any more detailed categories,
a blank list appears. In that case, touching
[Save Criteria] allows you to store it as the
currently selected category. Check the cur-
rent sequence at the top of the screen.
7 Enter the name and then touch [Done]
to complete the entry.
The storing process is complete and the short-
cut is available on “Saved Criteria”.
Searching for POIs by using the
memorized sequence
You can search for POIs with using the pre-
stored shortcut.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Saved Criteria].
3 Touch one of the items on the list.
4 Touch the POI you want.
5 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Deleting memorized sequence
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [POI].
2 Touch [Saved Criteria].
Searching for and selecting a location
En 47
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
3 Touch [Delete] on the right of the item
that you want to delete.
Searching for POIs by using
the data on external
storage devices (USB, SD)
Creating a customized POI is possible by
using the utility program “AVIC FEEDS”which
is available separately, on your PC. (“AVIC
FEEDS”will be available on our website.) Stor-
ing the customized POI properly and connect-
ing the external storage device (USB, SD)
enables the system to use the data for
searches.
1 Connect the USB device or insert the SD
card.
2 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [USB/SD].
3 Touch the storage that you want to
load from.
4 Touch the folder you want on the list.
5 Touch one of the items on the list.
6 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Searching for and selecting a location
En
48
Chapter
03
Searching for a location by
coordinates
Entering a latitude and longitude pinpoints
the location.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Coordinate].
3 Touch either the latitude key or the
longitude key, whichever you want to
enter.
The values on the latitude key or longitude key
shows the coordinates on the cursor just be-
fore entering this screen.
4 Touch to delete the current value
and enter the desired coordinate.
!Touching [N/S]or[E/W] changes the hemi-
sphere.
5 Touch [Done].
The screen returns to the previous screen.
Touch the other key that you have not entered
yet, enter the latitude or longitude and then
touch [Done] to finish the entry.
6 Touch [OK].
The “Map Confirmation Screen”appears.
7 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Searching for and selecting a location
En 49
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Selecting a location you
searched for recently
The places that you have searched for in the
past are automatically stored in “History”.
Selecting an item from the list provides an
easy way to specify the position.
p“History”can store up to 32 locations. If
the entries reach the maximum, the new
entry overwrites the oldest one.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [History].
2 Touch the entry you want.
3 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Deleting an entry in “History”
Items in “History”can be deleted. All entries
in “History”can also be deleted at once.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [History].
2 Touch [Delete] on the right of the item
that you want to delete.
3 Touch [Yes].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
pTouching [Clear History] allows you to de-
lete all the entries.
pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to mistakenly delete
items.
Selecting a location stored
in “Favorites”
Storing locations you visit frequently saves
time and effort.
Selecting an item from the list provides an
easy way to specify the position.
p“Favorites”can store up to 30 locations.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Favorites].
Searching for and selecting a location
En
50
Chapter
03
2 Touch the entry you want.
3 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Deleting an entry in “Favorites”
All entries in “Favorites”can be deleted at
once.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Favorites].
2 Touch [Clear All].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
3 Touch [Yes].
pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to mistakenly delete
items.
Setting up a route to your
home
If your home location is stored, the route
home can be calculated by touching a single
key.
%Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Return Home].
When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
When a route has already been set, a message
will appear asking you to cancel it. Touch [Yes]
to start the route calculation.
pIf the home location has not been stored
yet, set the location first.
=For details, refer to Setting your home po-
sition on page 154.
Setting a route by recalling
a saved route
Saving a route enables you to recall the same
route. Selecting a saved item from a list is an
easy way to set a saved route.
Selecting an item from the list provides an
easy way to specify the position.
!If there are no entries on the list, save a
route first.
=For details concerning other operations,
refer to Storing the current route on page
62.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Saved Routes].
Searching for and selecting a location
En 51
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
2 Touch the entry you want.
If no route has been set yet, the saved route is
recalled and the guidance will start im-
mediately.
Searching for a location by
scrolling the map
Specifying a location after scrolling the map
enables you to set the position as an operable
target in the “Map Confirmation Screen”.
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
2 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the
map to the position you want.
3 Touch to display the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
The “Map Confirmation Screen”appears.
4 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
Touch [Route...] then [Go Here Now] to set
your selected position as your destination and
calculate the route up that point.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Searching for and selecting a location
En
52
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
En 53
Chapter
03
Searching for and selecting a location
What you can do with the “Map Confirmation Screen”
Under most conditions after searching for a location, the “Map Confirmation Screen”appears, so you
can select the next operation. The options shown below are available on this screen:
Map
Shows a full-screen 2D map centered on the
cursor position.
Save as...
Places a map pin, and saves the position.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Save as... on the next page.
Route...
Sets the destination, waypoints, and starting
point positions.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Route... on this page.
Info
Shows detailed information about the location
of the cursor position.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Viewing information about a specified loca-
tion on page 56.
Call
Enables you to call the POI that has a tele-
phone number. (Pairing with cellular phone
featuring Bluetooth wireless technology is re-
quired.)
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Dialing a phone number of the POI on page
79.
Route...
Go Here Now
Calculates the new route by setting the cursor
position as the new destination.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Setting the location as a new destination on
the next page.
Add Via
Recalculates the route by adding the cursor
position as a waypoint.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Setting the location as a waypoint on the
next page.
Continue
Recalculates the route by setting the cursor
position as the new destination. The previous
destination becomes a waypoint.
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
En
54
Chapter
04
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Replacing the location as the new final desti-
nation on this page.
Starting Point
Sets the location as a starting point.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Setting the location as the start point on
this page.
Save as...
Add Pin
Puts a map pin at the cursor position as a
mark up.
=For details, refer to Placing a map pin on the
location on the next page.
Add POI
Stores the cursor position as a POI.
=For details, refer to Registering the location
as a customized POI on page 57.
Add Favorite
Stores the cursor position as one of the “Fa-
vorites”.
=For details, refer to Storing the location in
“Favorites”on page 58.
Setting the location as a
new destination
1 Touch [Route...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Go Here Now].
When the route is not set, route calculation
starts immediately.
When a route has already been set, a message
will appear asking you to cancel it. Touch [Yes]
to start the route calculation.
pWhen the cursor overlaps with a destina-
tion that has already been set, touch [Re-
move Dest.] to cancel the current route or
recalculate the route by setting one of the
remaining waypoints as the destination.
Setting the location as a
waypoint
1 Touch [Route...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Add Via].
pWhen the cursor overlaps a waypoint al-
ready set, touch [Remove Via] to delete the
waypoint and recalculate the route.
Replacing the location as
the new final destination
1 Touch [Route...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Continue].
pRecalculates the route by setting the cursor
position as the new destination. The pre-
vious destination becomes a waypoint.
Setting the location as the
start point
When there is no route, only the starting point
can be set. Otherwise, the new route from the
starting point to the current destination will be
recalculated.
1 Touch [Route...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
En 55
Chapter
04
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
2 Touch [Starting Point].
pWhen the cursor overlaps with a starting
point already set, it changes to [Remove
Start]. All waypoints already set are
deleted.
Viewing information about
a specified location
Locating the cursor to your desired position
enables you to view detailed information about
the location by using the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
1 Press the MAP button to display the na-
vigation map screen.
2 Touch and drag the screen to scroll the
map to the position you want.
3 Touch to display the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
The “Map Confirmation Screen”appears.
4 Touch [Info] at the bottom of the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
The “Point Info”screen appears.
1
2
1The address and coordinates
2Information about a nearby POI
pUp to 300 nearby POIs will be listed.
5 Touch or to scroll the nearby POI list
and then touch the desired POI.
Touching one of the listed POIs enables you to
view more detailed information about the POI.
6 Touch [OK].
If you touch [OK], the
“Map Confirmation Screen”appears with a
focus on the selected POI.
Placing a map pin on the
location
The pin-shaped icons called “map pins”can
be used just like markers. Placing the colored
pins on the map makes the position stand out
and helps you to find the position easily later.
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
En
56
Chapter
04
1 Search for a location or position the
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the
map and displaying the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Save as...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
3 Touch [Add Pin].
The pin icon is placed on the map and the
screen returns to the map screen.
pThe color of the pin icon is assigned auto-
matically within predefined colors when
you set it up.
Removing a map pin
When the cursor overlaps a map pin that has
already been set, you can remove the map pin.
1 Locate the cursor at the pin icon and
display the “Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Save as...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
3 Touch [Remove Pins].
The pin icon is removed and the screen re-
turns to the map screen.
Registering the location as
a customized POI
If a new business has opened, it may not be
found in the database. Registering the loca-
tion as a new POI allows you to use the item
just like a preinstalled POI.
1 Search for a location or position the
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the
map and displaying the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Save as...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
3 Touch [Add POI].
The list of POI categories appears.
4 Touch the desired category to which
the location is to be assigned.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, repeat this step as many
times as necessary.
5 Touch [Add here] when the desired ca-
tegory list appears to add the item to it.
If there aren’t any more detailed categories,
the blank list appears. In such case, touching
[Add here] allows you to add the item and
register it as an item belonging to the category
that you selected on the previous screen.
pTouching [Add here] without selecting any
category is invalid.
6 Enter the name and then touch [Done]
to complete the entry.
The registration is now complete and the item
is available as a customized POI.
pYou can edit the stored POI later in “POI
Settings”.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Editing your customized POI on page 152.
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
En 57
Chapter
04
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
Storing the location in
“Favorites”
Storing your favorite locations as “Favorites”
provides you with the opportunity to save the
time and effort of re-entering this information.
Stored items can be made available on “Fa-
vorites”later.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Selecting a location stored in “Favorites”on
page 50.
p“Favorites”can store up to 30 locations.
1 Search for a location or position the
cursor on the desired area by scrolling the
map and displaying the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
2 Touch [Save as...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
3 Touch [Add Favorite].
4 Touch the entry you want.
Selecting an item that has already been stored
allows you to overwrite it.
5 Enter the name and then touch [Done]
to complete the entry.
Storage is complete and the item is available
as a preset entry on “Favorites”.
Deleting an entry in
“Favorites”
All entries in “Favorites”can be deleted at
once.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Favorites].
2 Touch [Clear All].
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
3 Touch [Yes].
pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to mistakenly delete
items.
After the location is decided (Map Confirmation Screen)
En
58
Chapter
04
Checking the current route
conditions
The “Route Information”screen provides you
with various detailed information about the
current route.
This is an example showing a route with two
waypoints.
pThis function is available only when the
route is set and your vehicle position is on
the route.
pYou can also display the “Route Informa-
tion”screen by touching “Multi-Info win-
dow”on the map screen.
=For details, refer to Multi-Info window
on page 37.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Route info].
The “Route Information”screen appears.
13 4
5
6
7
8
2
1Starting point
2Current position
3Waypoint
4Destination
5Time and distance up to the point currently
shown
The remaining distance and time, as well as
the estimated time of arrival are displayed.
6“Method:”is the route calculation method
that is currently set
=For details, refer to Route on page 147.
7Point currently shown and information re-
garding the point
8The route conditions up to the point cur-
rently shown
Touching the icon enables you to check the
details. If there are five or more icons, touch
to show the next four icons.
Checking the current route
En 59
Chapter
05
Checking the current route
3 Touch [Dest.] to switch to the first way-
point screen.
The “Route Information (to via)”screen ap-
pears.
4 Touch [Via] to switch to the second
waypoint screen.
The “Route Information (to via)”screen for
next waypoint appears.
5 Touch [Via] to return to the screen for
whole route.
The “Route Information”screen appears.
pIf three or more waypoints are set, each
touch of [Via] shows the screen for the next
waypoint.
Playing simulated travel at
high speed
This function allows you to play the simulated
navigation function at high speed without
voice guidance. This function is useful if you
want to browse how the current route will be
navigated.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Route info].
The “Route Information”screen appears.
3 Touch [Fly over].
The simulation will start.
pIf you want to stop the simulation, touch
on the map.
Checking the entire route
overview on the map
You can check the entire outline of the current
route.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Route info].
The “Route Information”screen appears.
3 Touch [Fit to Screen].
A 2D map screen will appear with the current
overall route fitted onto the screen.
Checking the current itinerary
You can check the route details.
pThis function is available only when the
route is set and your vehicle position is on
the route.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Itinerary].
3 Touch or to scroll the list.
Scroll the list as necessary.
1
2
3
1Turning direction
2Driving distance
3Names of the streets you are driving
through
4 Touch [Mode].
Each touch of [Mode] changes the list mode.
Checking the current route
En
60
Chapter
05
Alternative options:
!Detailed Instructions
All turning points, passed streets and other
information is shown.
!Instructions
All turning points (where voice guidance is
given) are shown.
!Road List
Displays the turning points in the most sim-
plified form (duplicated route names are
merged into one).
pWhen a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all roads. (In this case, the remaining
roads will be shown in the list as you drive
on.)
Checking the current route
En 61
Chapter
05
Checking the current route
Editing waypoints
You can edit waypoints (locations you want to
visit on the way to your destination) and recal-
culate the route so that is passes through
these locations.
Adding a waypoint
1 Search for a location.
=For more details, refer to the descriptions
from page 42 to page 52.
2 Touch [Route...] on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”.
3 Touch [Add Via].
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Sorting waypoints on this page.
pWhen you set waypoints in the route to your
destination, the route up to the next way-
point will appear in light green. The rest of
the route will appear in light blue.
Sorting waypoints
You can sort waypoints and recalculate the
route.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Edit Route].
The “Edit Route”screen appears.
3 Touch [i]or[j] to move the waypoint
or destination.
Put them in the desired order.
Touching [Optimize] sorts the waypoints auto-
matically so that the route will compromise
the least time and distance.
4 Touch [Done].
The route is recalculated and the map of the
current position appears.
Deleting a waypoint
You can delete waypoints from the route and
then recalculate the route. (You can delete
waypoints successively.)
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Edit Route].
The “Edit Route”screen appears.
3 Touch [Delete] on the right of the way-
point that you want to delete.
The waypoint will be deleted from the list.
4 Touch [Done].
The route is recalculated and the map of the
current position appears.
Storing the current route
Storing the current route allows you to recall
and set the stored route.
pThis function is available only when the
route is set and your vehicle position is on
the route.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Route Function].
2 Touch [Save Route].
Editing waypoints and the destination
En
62
Chapter
06
3 Enter the name and then touch [Done]
to complete the entry.
The previous screen appears.
pSaved route can be recalled later.
=For details, refer to Setting a route by recal-
ling a saved route on page 51.
Deleting the entry in “Saved
Routes”
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Saved Routes].
2 Touch [Delete] on the right of the item
that you want to delete.
pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to mistakenly delete
items.
Deleting the current route
If you no longer need to travel to your destina-
tion, follow the steps below to delete the cur-
rent route and cancel the route guidance.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [Delete Route].
A message confirming the cancellation of the
current route appears.
2 Touch [Yes].
Editing waypoints and the destination
En 63
Chapter
06
Editing waypoints and the destination
If you have an active subscription to
MSN Direct service, you can check and
browse various information on your navigation
system, such as gas prices, movie times,
weather conditions and traffic information.
The information will be updated periodically.
—This function is available for AVIC-X910BT
only.
Notice about MSN Direct™
Pioneer is not responsible for the accuracy of
the MSN Direct content. The MSN Direct con-
tent may not be current or available at times,
and is subject to change without notice. To re-
ceive MSN Direct content, you must subscribe
to the MSN Direct service, and you must be
within the MSN Direct coverage area. Cover-
age may also be affected by the availability and
relative strength of FM transmissions, as well
as reception limitations of Microsoft’s Direct-
Band network.
Please visit
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer
or current coverage area maps, subscription
details, and other important information about
MSN Direct.
Activating the service
You have to activate MSN Direct first.
pA web-connected computer is required for
the online subscription.
pIf you have difficulty for the online subscrip-
tion, please call toll-free 1-866-658-7032.
General flow chart:
1Check your product key.
You have to know your product key for the
subscription.
(Refer to Checking your product key on this
page.)
j
2Make an online subscription to MSN Direct
service using your PC.
(Refer to Subscribing to the MSN Direct ser-
vice on the next page.)
j
3Activate the MSN Direct service on this pro-
duct.
(Refer to Activating the MSN Direct function
on the next page.)
j
4Activation is complete.
Checking your product key
The product key that you can find here is used
in the online subscription.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct”screen appears.
2 Touch [Status].
3 Write your product key down in the fol-
lowing box;
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En
64
Chapter
07
Subscribing to the MSN Direct
service
Within two days of completing the subscription,
execute Activating the MSN Direct function.
1 Access the following URL and read the
description.
http://www.msndirect.com/pioneer
2 Be sure to check the coverage area and
other availabilities of MSN Direct on the
web page.
3 Go to the page for activation and enter
your product key.
4 Follow the directions on the web page
to complete the subscription.
Activating the MSN Direct function
After the online subscription, complete the ac-
tivation so that the navigation system can re-
ceive the information.
This operation must be performed under the
following conditions
—You are currently in the coverage area of
MSN Direct.
—The signal strength ( )on“MSN Direct”
screen is not weak.
1 Boot-up your navigation system.
2 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct”screen appears.
Check the signal strength. If the signal is
weak, move to another location where a stron-
ger signal can be received.
3 Touch [Status].
4 Wait until the activation status changes
to “Active”.
It may take approximately 20 or 30 minutes to
complete the activation.
After activation is complete, the information
will be available on each menu.
Browsing gas prices
Recent gas prices of nearby gas stations are
displayed in a list.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates gas price information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual gas prices. Please refer to Notice about
MSN Direct™on the previous page.
It may take up to 24 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
!When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
!When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
!After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
The “MSN Direct”screen appears.
2 Touch [Gas Prices].
3 Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En 65
Chapter
07
Browsing information on MSN Direct
![Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
![Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
![Price]:
Sorts the items in the list by price.
4 Touch on the item that you want to
view in detail.
1The names of gas stations and their loca-
tions
2Gas prices
The information in ( ) shows how current
the information is.
3Distance from the current position
5 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Browsing movie times
Nearby theaters can be displayed on a list.
Switching the screen allows you to see the
movie title now showing.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates movie information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
movie information. Please refer to Notice
about MSN Direct™on page 64.
It may take up to 6 hours for all the data to be-
come available under the following conditions:
!When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
!When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
!After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
Searching for a theater by
selecting a movie title
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Movie Times].
3 Touch [All Movie Titles].
The movie titles now showing are displayed.
4 Touch the desired movie title.
The theaters that are currently showing the se-
lected movie are displayed.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En
66
Chapter
07
5 Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
![Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
![Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
6 Touch on the item that you want to
view in detail.
12
1The names of theaters and their locations
2Distance from the current position
7 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Searching for a movie title by
selecting a theater
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Movie Times].
The nearby theaters are displayed.
3 Touch the desired tab to change the
sort order.
Available options;
![Distance] (default):
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
![Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
4 Touch the desired theater.
The movie titles currently shown on the se-
lected theater are displayed.
5 Touch on the item that you want to
view in detail.
6 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En 67
Chapter
07
Browsing information on MSN Direct
Browsing weather
information
Local weather information can be displayed
on a list. Switching the screen allows you to
see worldwide weather conditions.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates weather information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual weather conditions. Please refer to Notice
about MSN Direct™on page 64.
Checking the local weather
information
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Weather].
The local weather information is displayed.
The area name, distance and direction from
current position are displayed on the list. The
items on the list are sorted by distance.
3 Touch the desired area.
Detailed information is displayed.
Touching [Forecast] displays the weather fore-
casts for these three days.
Checking worldwide weather
conditions
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Weather].
The local weather information is displayed.
3 Touch [Worldwide].
Worldwide weather conditions are displayed.
The area name, distance and direction from
current position are displayed on the list. The
list is sorted alphabetically by the area name.
4 Touch the desired area.
Detailed information is displayed.
Using traffic information
You can view current traffic conditions and in-
formation. When the navigation system re-
ceives updated traffic information, it will
overlay the traffic information on your map
and also display detailed text information
when available.
In the default setting, the navigation system
takes into account traffic information and tries
to avoid traffic congestions and suggest better
routes. Also, when you are traveling along a
route and the system finds another better
route for avoiding the traffic congestion, the
current route will be recalculated automati-
cally.
The term “traffic congestion”in this section in-
dicates the following types of traffic condi-
tions:
—Stop-and-go traffic
—Stopped traffic
—Closed/blocked roads
Viewing the traffic event
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in
the form of a list. This allows you to check how
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En
68
Chapter
07
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about
MSN Direct™on page 64.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Traffic].
A list with traffic information that has been re-
ceived is shown. The list is sorted by distance
from your current position.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed on the list.
1 2 3
45
1Event-related icon
2Street or location and direction
3Distance to the location and event
4Switching to traffic flow list
=For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Viewing the traffic flow on
this page.
5Touch to change the settings of traffic infor-
mation.
=For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Setting the traffic informa-
tion on the next page.
3 Touch the item you want to check its
position on the map.
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
Traffic event icon and line
!with yellow line:
Heavy traffic
!with red line:
Traffic jam
!with black line:
Closed/blocked roads
!etc.:
Accidents, constructions, etc.
Viewing the traffic flow
Traffic Information is displayed on a screen in
the form of a list. This allows you to check how
many traffic incidents have occurred, their lo-
cation and their distance from your current po-
sition.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates traffic information, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to actual
traffic conditions. Please refer to Notice about
MSN Direct™on page 64.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Traffic].
3 Touch [Traffic Flow].
A list with traffic event information that has
been received is shown.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed on the list.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En 69
Chapter
07
Browsing information on MSN Direct
1 2 3
45
1Flow-related icon
2Street or location and direction
3Distance to the location and event
4Switching to traffic event list
=For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Viewing the traffic event on
page 68.
5Touch to change the settings of traffic infor-
mation.
=For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Setting the traffic informa-
tion on this page.
4 Touch the item you want to check its
position on the map.
The traffic event information displayed on the
map is as follows.
Traffic flow icon and line
!Red: average speed in this area is slower
than 15mph (24 km/h)
!Yellow: average speed in this area is be-
tween 15 mph to 45mph (24 km/h to 72 km/
h)
!Green: average speed in this area is faster
than 45 mph (72 km/h) (An icon without a
line will be displayed)
Setting the traffic information
Preferred functions related to traffic informa-
tion can be set.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Traffic] and then touch [Set-
tings].
The “Traffic Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Recalculate route avoiding traffic”
[Enabled]:
Calculates the new route with the traffic
congestion taken into account when rerout-
ing.
[Disabled]:
Calculates the new route without taking
traffic jam into account when rerouting.
!“Sort events by”
[Distance]:
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by
distance.
[Type]:
Sorts the traffic event items in the list by
event type.
!“Use traffic information”
[On]:
Calculates the route with the traffic conges-
tion taken into account in the initial calcula-
tion.
[Off]:
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En
70
Chapter
07
Calculates the route without taking traffic
jam into account in the initial
calculation.
Browsing news headlines
Recent news headlines are displayed in a list.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates news headlines, the information pro-
vided may not necessarily correspond to
current news headlines. Please refer to Notice
about MSN Direct™on page 64.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [News Headlines].
3 Touch the desired news headline.
Further details about the news are displayed.
4 Touch or to scroll the list.
Browsing local events
The nearby events to be held in the next few
days are displayed on a list, and you can see
the detail event information.
Although the MSN Direct service regularly up-
dates local event information, the information
provided may not necessarily correspond to ac-
tual local event conditions. Please refer to No-
tice about MSN Direct™on page 64.
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Local Events].
The recent local events are displayed in a list.
3 Touch the desired event to display de-
tailed information of the event.
Available options;
![Name]:
Sorts the items in the list alphabetically.
![Distance]:
Sorts the items in the list in order by dis-
tance from the vehicle position.
![Time]:
Sorts the items in the list in order by the
time when the event is opened.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En 71
Chapter
07
Browsing information on MSN Direct
4 Touch [Select] to display there with the
map.
The “Map Confirmation Screen”appears.
5 Touch one of the options at the bottom
of the “Map Confirmation Screen”to select
the next operation.
=For details of other operations on the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, refer to What
you can do with the
“Map Confirmation Screen”on page 54.
Browsing stock quotes
Recent stock quotes are displayed in a list.
Although the stock quote displayed onscreen
is updated about 40 minutes (approx.), these
prices are not realtime values.
It may take up to 20 minutes for all the data to
become available under the following condi-
tions:
!When you use MSN Direct for the first time.
!When you have not performed this function
previously around the current area.
!After the navigation system has been
turned off for a few days.
=Please refer to Notice about MSN Direct™
on page 64.
Selecting stock symbols
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Stock Quotes].
pThe blank list appears when no symbols are
selected.
3 Touch [Select].
The list of stock symbols is displayed.
4 Touch the stock symbol that you want
to add.
When you touch the symbol, a check mark ap-
pears indicating that it is selected.
pTo cancel the selection, remove the check
mark by touching the item again.
pArrow in the left of each item indicates the
stock price movement. If there is no stock
price movements than previous close, “—”
is displayed.
Viewing the detailed stock quotes
1 Touch [Destination] on the “Top Menu”,
and then touch [MSN Direct].
2 Touch [Stock Quotes].
3 Touch the desired stock quote.
Detailed stock quote information is dis-
played.
Browsing information on MSN Direct
En
72
Chapter
07
Hands-free phoning overview
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid talking on the phone as
much as possible while driving.
If your cellular phone features Bluetooth®
technology, this navigation system can be con-
nected to your cellular phone wirelessly. Using
this hands-free function, you can operate the
navigation system to make or receive phone
calls. You can also transfer the phone book
data stored in your cellular phone to the navi-
gation system. This section describes how to
set up a Bluetooth connection and how to op-
erate a cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
technology on the navigation system.
For more information about the connectivity
with the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology, refer to the information
on our website.
Preparing communication
devices
This navigation system has a built-in function
to use cellular phones featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology.
While your cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology is connected, the Blue-
tooth connection status indicator lights.
=For details, refer to Notes for hands-free
phoning on page 84.
pWhen the navigation system is turned off,
the Bluetooth connection is also discon-
nected. When the system restarts, the sys-
tem automatically attempts to reconnect
the previously-connected cellular phone.
Even when the connection is severed for
some reason, the system automatically re-
connects the specified cellular phone (ex-
cept when the connection is severed due to
cellular phone operation).
Displaying the Phone Menu
Use the “Phone Menu”if you connect the cel-
lular phone to the navigation system for utiliza-
tion.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2 Touch [Phone].
4
123
1: Network name of the cellular phone
company
2: Reception status of the cellular phone
3: Battery status of the cellular phone
4: Name of connected cellular phone
Registering your cellular
phone
You need to register your cellular phone featur-
ing Bluetooth wireless technology when you
connect it for the first time. A total of three
phones can be registered. Three registration
methods are available:
!Searching for nearby phones
!Searching for a specified phone
!Pairing from your cellular phone
pThe default device name displayed on the
cellular phone is “Pioneer Navi”. The PIN
code is “1111”.
Using hands-free phoning
En 73
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
Searching for nearby phones
The system searches for available cellular
phones near the navigation system, displays
them in a list, and registers them for connec-
tion.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
2 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on the previous page.
3 Touch [Connection].
4 Touch [Add Device], and then [Search
devices].
The system searches for cellular phones fea-
turing Bluetooth technology that are waiting
for the connection and displays them in the
list if the device has found.
pUp to 10 cellular phones will be listed in the
order that the cellular phone is found.
5 Wait until your cellular phone appears
in the list.
pIf you cannot find the cellular phone you
want to connect, check that the cellular
phone is waiting for the Bluetooth wireless
technology connection.
6 Touch the cellular phone name you
want to register.
A message prompting you to enter a PIN code
appears.
7 Enter the PIN code “1111”using the cel-
lular phone.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone
Settings”menu by touching [OK].
Searching for a specified phone
If you cannot connect your phone using
[Search devices] and [Pair from the mobile
phone], try this method if your phone is found
in the list.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
2 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on the previous page.
3 Touch [Connection].
4 Touch [Add Device], and then [Select
specific devices].
Using hands-free phoning
En
74
Chapter
08
5 Touch the model name of the cellular
phone to be connected.
The system searches for cellular phones fea-
turing Bluetooth technology that are waiting
for the connection and displays them in the
list if the device has found.
pIf you cannot find the desired model name
on the list, touch [Other phones] to search
the cellular phones available nearby.
6 Select the cellular phone you want to
register from the list.
A message prompting you to enter a PIN code
appears.
7 Enter the PIN code “1111”using the cel-
lular phone.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone
Settings”menu by touching [OK].
Pairing from your cellular phone
You can register the cellular phone by setting
the navigation system to standby mode and re-
questing connection from the cellular phone.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
2 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
3 Touch [Connection].
4 Touch [Add Device], and then [Pair from
the mobile phone].
The navigation system waits for a Bluetooth
wireless technology connection.
5 Register the navigation system on your
cellular phone.
If your cellular phone asks you to enter a pass-
word, enter the PIN code (password) of the na-
vigation system.
After the registration is completed, the follow-
ing screen appears.
pIf registration fails repeat the procedure
from the beginning.
Using hands-free phoning
En 75
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
Connecting a registered
cellular phone
The navigation system automatically connects
the cellular phone selected as the target of
connection. However, connect the cellular
phone manually in the following cases:
!Two or more cellular phones are registered,
and you want to manually select the cellu-
lar phone to be used.
!You want to reconnect a disconnected cel-
lular phone.
!Connection cannot be established automa-
tically for some reason.
If you start connection manually, carry out the
following procedure. You can also connect the
phone by having the navigation system detect
it automatically.
=For details, refer to Setting automatic con-
nection on page 83.
1 Activate the Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology on your cellular phone.
For some cellular phones, no specific action is
necessary to activate Bluetooth wireless tech-
nology. For details, refer to the instruction
manual of your cellular phone.
2 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
3 Touch [Connection].
4 Touch the name of the cellular phone
that you want to connect.
Connection starts.
When a connection is successfully estab-
lished, a connection complete message ap-
pears, the screen returns to the “Phone
Settings”menu by touching [OK].
pTo cancel the connection to your cellular
phone, touch [Cancel].
pIf connection fails, check to see whether
your cellular phone is waiting for a connec-
tion and then retry.
Disconnecting a cellular phone
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Connection].
3 Touch [Disconnect] next to the cellular
phone name.
Deleting a registered phone
If you no longer need to use a registered
phone with the navigation system, you can de-
lete it from the registration assignment to free
this spot up for another phone.
pIf a registered phone is deleted, all the
phone book entries and call history lists
that correspond to the phone will be also
cleared.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Connection].
3 Touch [Delete] next to the cellular
phone name.
The registration is canceled.
Using hands-free phoning
En
76
Chapter
08
Receiving a phone call
You can perform hands-free answering by
using the navigation system.
Answering an incoming call
The system informs you that it is receiving a
call by displaying a message and producing a
ring sound.
If [Auto Answer Preference] is set to [Off],
answer the call manually. Answering is avail-
able if any screen is displayed, such as the
map screen or the setting screen.
pYou can set this navigation system to auto-
matically answer incoming calls.
=For details, refer to Answering a call
automatically on page 82.
1 When a call comes in, the answering
operation menu appears on the bottom of
the screen.
2 To answer an incoming call, touch .
When there is an incoming call, you can reject
it by touching .
pYou can adjust volume when you are talk-
ing. To adjust volume, touch [Vol -] and
[Vol +] displayed on the screen (like below)
when you are talking.
3 Touch to end the call.
The call ends.
pWhen there is an incoming call, pressing
MULTI-CONTROL answers the call. During
the call, pressing MULTI-CONTROL gets
you off the phone.
pIf the voice on the other end of the call is
too quiet to hear, you can adjust the volume
of the received voice.
=For more details about “Phone Vo-
lume”, refer to Setting the phone volume
on page 82.
pYou may hear a noise when you hang up
the phone.
Rejecting an incoming call
You can reject an incoming call.
=For details, refer to Setting the automatic re-
jection function on page 83.
%When a call comes in, touch .
The call is rejected.
pThe rejected call is recorded in the missed
call history list.
=For details, refer to Dialing from the history
on the next page.
Making a phone call
You can make a phone call in many different
ways.
Using hands-free phoning
En 77
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
Direct dialing
1 Touch [Dial Pad] on the “Phone Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
The direct dial screen appears.
2 Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number.
The phone number that was input is dis-
played.
Input number
:
The input number is deleted a digit at a time
from the end of the number. Continuing to
press this deletes all of the digits.
:
Return to the previous screen.
3 Touch to make a call.
pTo cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch .
4 Touch to end the call.
Dialing from the history
The most recent calls made (dialed), received
and missed are stored in the call history list.
You can browse the call history list and call
numbers from it.
Making a phone call using the dialed
number history
The dialed number history saves 30 calls per
registered cellular phone. If the entries exceed
30, the oldest one will be deleted.
1 Touch [Dialed Numbers] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 If you touch an entry on the list, dialing
starts.
pIf you touch [Detail], you can check the de-
tails of the party before making a phone
call.
pTo cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch .
3 Touch to end the call.
Making a phone call using the
received call history
The received call history saves 30 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls
exceeds 30, the oldest entry will be deleted.
1 Touch [Received Calls] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 If you touch an entry on the list, dialing
starts.
pIf you touch [Detail], you can check the de-
tails of the party before making a phone
call.
pTo cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch .
3 Touch to end the call.
Making a phone call using missed
call history
The missed call history saves 20 calls per re-
gistered cellular phone. If the number of calls
exceeds 20, the oldest entry will be deleted.
1 Touch [Missed Calls] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
Using hands-free phoning
En
78
Chapter
08
2 If you touch an entry on the list, dialing
starts.
pIf you touch [Detail], you can check the de-
tails of the party before making a phone
call.
pTo cancel the call after the system starts
dialing, touch .
3 Touch to end the call.
Calling a number in the
“Contacts”screen
After finding the entry you want to call in the
“Contacts”screen, you can select the number
and make the call.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”.
2 Touch [Contacts].
The “Contacts”screen appears.
3 Switch the page of the list to display
the desired entry.
If you touch an alphabet tab, you can jump to
the first page of the contacts whose names
start with that letter.
or :
Shows the next or previous page.
Alphabet tabs
Makes the screen jump to the beginning of
the page including the entry whose names
start with any of selected alphabets.
Touching [#ABCDE] also displays the page in-
cluding the entry whose names start with pri-
mary symbols or numbers.
Touching [Others] displays the page including
entries that are not assigned to any of the
other tabs.
4 Touch the desired entry on the list to
make a call.
5 Touch to end the call.
Dialing a phone number of the POI
You can make a call to the POI that has a tele-
phone number.
1 To display the
“Map Confirmation Screen”, search for a
locations or moves the cursor and touch
.
2 Touch [Info] and select the POI that has
a telephone number.
3 Touch [Call] to make a call.
To cancel the call after the system starts dial-
ing, touch .
4 Touch to end the call.
Making a call home easily
You can call home without taking the time to
enter the phone number if the phone number
has been registered.
%Touch [Call Home] on the “Phone
Menu”.
Dialing home starts.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
Using hands-free phoning
En 79
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
pIf you have not registered your home num-
ber, a message appears. Touch [Yes]to
start registration.
=For more details about “Set Home”,
refer to Setting your home position on
page 154.
Dialing GOOG-411
CAUTION
Local and/or long distance charges for making a
phone call may apply.
You can dial GOOG-411 to dial the free busi-
ness listing service of Googleäwith one
touch.
1 Touch [GOOG-411] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
Dialing GOOG-411 starts.
2 You can now use the GOOG-411 phone
service.
For details about GOOG-411 service and avail-
ability, contact Googleä.
Announcing incoming
short mails
While the cellular phone and the navigation
system are connected, the following notice is
displayed when you get a new SMS message.
“New mail from: (sender’s name)”is dis-
played and the notice disappears after eight
seconds.
pTouch anywhere on the screen to clear the
announcement message.
pIf the voice language with TTS is currently
used, the audible message can be output.
=For details, refer to Selecting the lan-
guage on page 155.
Transferring the phone book
You can transfer the numbers in a registered
user phone’s address book into the phone
book.
pWith some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer the entire phone book
at once. In this case, transfer addresses
one at a time from your phone book using
your cellular phone.
pThe maximum 400 entries can be trans-
ferred per cellular phone. If the entries ex-
ceed 400, the extra entries will not be
transferred. If more than one number is re-
gistered for one person, such as work place
and home, each number is counted sepa-
rately.
pEach entry can hold up to 3 phone num-
bers.
Using hands-free phoning
En
80
Chapter
08
pDepending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, this navigation sys-
tem may not be able to display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled.)
pIf the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be correctly transferred.
1 Connect the cellular phone that has the
phone book to transfer.
=For details, refer to Connecting a registered
cellular phone on page 76.
2 Touch [Phone Book Transfer] on the
“Phone Menu”.
The confirmation messages appear.
3 Check the messages and touch [OK].
pIf there is a phone book already transferred,
a message asking whether you can accept
the data replacement appears.
4 Check that the following screen is dis-
played, and operate your cellular phone to
transfer the phone book entries.
Transfer starts. It may take time depending on
how many entries will be transferred.
pYou can send the phone book entries re-
peatedly before touching [OK]. If your cellu-
lar phone supports one-by-one transfer
only, send all the entries that you want to
transfer before touching [OK].
pIf your phone has a capability for automatic
transfer of phone book, this screen is
skipped and transfer will start.
pThe transferred data can not be edited on
the navigation system.
5 When the completion message ap-
pears, check the message and touch [OK].
Transfer ends.
Clearing memory
You can clear the memory of each item that
corresponds to the connected cellular phone:
phone book, dialed/received/missed call his-
tory list and preset dials.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Clear Memory].
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
Contacts:
You can clear the registered phone book.
Received Calls List:
You can clear the received call history list.
Dialed Calls List:
You can clear the dialed call history list.
Missed Calls List:
You can clear the missed call history list.
pTouching [Clear] displays the confirmation
message for clearing the memory.
pTouching [Clear All] clears all the data that
correspond to the connected cellular
phone.
Using hands-free phoning
En 81
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
3 Touch [OK].
Data on the selected item is cleared from this
navigation system’s memory.
pIf you do not want to clear memory that you
have selected, touch [Cancel].
Setting the phone
Setting the phone volume
The volume level for hands-free phoning can
be adjusted.
1 Touch [Phone Volume] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Adjust volume to touch the sliders of
[Phone Ringtone] and [Phone Voice].
[Phone Ringtone]:
This setting controls the incoming ring tone
volume.
[Phone Voice]:
This setting controls the incoming voice vo-
lume.
pPhone volume varies depending on the in-
coming caller's phone, volume setting and
other conditions.
=For details concerning operations, refer
to Answering an incoming call on page
77.
Stopping Bluetooth wave
transmission
You can stop transmission of electric waves by
turning off the Bluetooth function. If you do
not use the Bluetooth wireless technology, we
recommend selecting [Off].
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Off] next to “Bluetooth On/Off”.
Touching [Bluetooth On/Off] switching be-
tween [On] and [Off].
Answering a call automatically
The navigation system automatically answers
incoming calls to the cellular phone, so you
can answer a call while driving without taking
your hands off the steering wheel.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch the key next to [Auto Answer
Preference].
Auto Answer Preference selection appears.
3 Touch the desired option.
[Off]: No automatic response. Respond manu-
ally
[Immediately]: Answers immediately
[After 3 seconds]: Answers after three sec-
onds
Using hands-free phoning
En
82
Chapter
08
[After 6 seconds]: Answers after six seconds
[After 10 seconds]: Answers after ten sec-
onds
Setting the automatic rejection
function
If this function is on, the navigation system
automatically rejects all incoming calls.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch the key next to “Refuse All
Calls”.
Touching the key activates or deactivates the
function.
pIf both “Refuse All Calls”and “Auto An-
swer Preference”are set to [On], “Refuse
All Calls”is prioritized and all incoming
calls are automatically rejected.
Echo canceling and noise reduction
When you are operating hands-free phoning
in the vehicle, you may hear an undesirable
echo. This function reduces the echo and
noise while you are using hands-free phoning,
and maintains a certain sound quality.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Echo Cancel].
Touching [Echo Cancel] switches between
[On] and [Off].
Setting automatic connection
When automatic connection is active, the na-
vigation system will automatically establish a
connection with a registered phone when it
comes into range. Using this feature avoids all
of the processes for establishing a connec-
tion.
pWith some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to perform automatic connection.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Auto Connect].
Touching [Auto Connect] switches between
[On] and [Off].
pAutomatic connection is performed in the
registration number order.
pSome cellular phones do not support auto-
matic connection.
Editing the device name
You can change the device name to be dis-
played on your cellular phone. (Default is
[Pioneer Navi].)
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Edit Name].
The keyboard to enter the name appears.
3 Touch to delete the current name,
and enter the new name by using the key-
board.
4 Touch [Done].
The name is changed.
Using hands-free phoning
En 83
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
pUp to 30 characters can be entered for a de-
vice name.
Notes for hands-free phoning
General notes
!Connection to all cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology is not guar-
anteed.
!The line-of-sight distance between this na-
vigation system and your cellular phone
must be 10 meters or less when sending
and receiving voice and data via Bluetooth
technology. However, the actual transmis-
sion distance may be shorter than the esti-
mated distance, depending on the usage
environment.
!With some cellular phones, the speakers of
the system may not produce a ring sound.
!If private mode is selected on the cellular
phone, hands-free phoning may be dis-
abled.
!The cellular phone used must be compati-
ble with the profile of this navigation sys-
tem.
!When using Bluetooth wireless technology,
this navigation system may not be able to
operate all of the functions on the cellular
phone.
Registration and connection
!Cellular phone operations vary depending
on the type of cellular phone. Refer to the
instruction manual that came with your cel-
lular phone for detailed instructions.
!With cellular phones, phone book transfer
may not work even though your phone is
paired with the navigation system. In that
case, disconnect your phone, perform pair-
ing again from your phone to the naviga-
tion system, and then perform the phone
book transfer.
Making and receiving calls
!You may hear a noise in the following situa-
tions:
—When you answer the phone by using
the button on the phone.
—When the person on the other end of
line hangs up the phone.
!If the person on the other end of the phone
call cannot hear the conversation due to an
echo, decrease the volume level for hands-
free phoning. This may reduce the echo.
!With some cellular phones, even if you
press the accept button on the cellular
phone when a call comes in, hands-free
phoning may not be performed.
!The registered name appears if the phone
number of the received call is already regis-
tered in the phone book. When one phone
number is registered under different
names, the name that comes first alphabe-
tically is displayed.
!If the phone number of the received call is
not registered in the phone book, the
phone number of the received call appears.
!During incoming and outgoing calls or talk-
ing on a phone, you can only do the follow-
ing operations:
—Touching ,,[Vol +], and [Vol -].
—Press the MAP button.
—Scrolling the map and changing the
map scale.
The received call history and the dialed
number history
!Calls made or editing performed only on
your cellular phone will not be reflected to
the dialed number history or phone book in
the navigation system.
!You cannot make a call to the entry of an
unknown user (no phone number) in the re-
ceived call history.
!History data will be recorded into the navi-
gation system only when your cellular
phone is pairing with the navigation sys-
tem.
Phone book transfers
!If there are more than 400 phone book en-
tries on your cellular phone, all entries may
not be able to be downloaded completely.
Using hands-free phoning
En
84
Chapter
08
!With some cellular phones, it may not be
possible to transfer all items in the phone
book at one time. In this case, transfer
items one by one from your cellular phone.
!Depending on the cellular phone, this navi-
gation system may not display the phone
book correctly. (Some characters may be
garbled, or first name and last name may
be in reverse order.)
!If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, the phone book may not
be transferred correctly. (Image data can-
not be transferred from the cellular phone.)
!Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book transfer may not be available.
Updating the Bluetooth
wireless technology software
Update files will be available for download in
the future. You will be able to download the lat-
est update from an appropriate website to
your PC.
pBefore you download the files and install
the update, read through the instructions
on the website. Follow the instructions on
the website for steps until [Software Up-
date] becomes active.
pRegistered phones that are listed on [Con-
nection] are cleared by the software up-
date.
1 Touch [Phone Settings] on the “Phone
Menu”.
=For details, refer to Displaying the Phone
Menu on page 73.
2 Touch [Bluetooth Software Update].
The current version is displayed.
3 Touch [Software Update].
Update starts.
Using hands-free phoning
En 85
Chapter
08
Using hands-free phoning
You can play a normal music CD using the
built-in drive of the navigation system. This
section describes how.
1 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first track of the CD.
2 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “CD”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
3 Use the touch panel keys on the screen
to control the disc.
Reading the screen
1 2 34
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Track number indicator
Shows the number of the track currently play-
ing.
3Scan/Random/Repeat indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
: Scan
: Random
and repeat range: Displays the current
repeat range
4Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
Using the touch panel keys
Touch panel keys
12
3
4
5
6
7
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Switch the media file type played
=For details, refer to Switch the media
file type played on page 88.
4Skip the track forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching it again will skip
to the previous track.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pFast reverse is canceled when it reaches
the beginning of the first track on the
disc.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
5Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
6Shuffle All
All of the songs in the disc can be played at
random by touching only one key.
p[Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-
X710BT.
pTo cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom]to[Off] on the “Function”menu.
7Display the map screen
Playing audio CDs
En
86
Chapter
09
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file
names or folder names on a disc and select
one of them to play.
1 Touch [List].
2 Touch the track you want to play.
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
pThe “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information.
3 To return to the previous screen, touch
[Detail].
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “CD”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12 3
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Disc —Repeats the current disc
!Track —Repeats just the current track
pIf you perform track search or fast for-
ward/rewind, repeat play is automati-
cally canceled.
2Play tracks in a random order
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off].
3Scan tracks of a CD
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. Scan play lets you hear the first
10 seconds of each track on the CD. When
you find the track you want, touch [Scan]to
turn scan play off.
pAfter scanning is finished, normal play-
back of the tracks will begin again.
Playing audio CDs
En 87
Chapter
09
Playing audio CDs
You can play a disc that contains compressed
audio files using the built-in drive of the navi-
gation system. This section describes these
operations.
pIn the following description, the MP3,
WMA, AAC, WAV files are collectively re-
ferred to as “Compressed audio file”.
pAVIC-X910BT cannot play WAV files.
1 Insert the disc you want to play into
disc-loading slot.
Playback starts from the first file of the ROM.
2 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “ROM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
3 Use this ROM screen to play the disc.
=For details, refer to Using the touch panel
keys on this page.
Reading the screen
13456
8
9
a
b
2
7
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
3Track indicator
Shows the track number currently playing.
4Scan/Random/Repeat indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
: Scan
: Random
and repeat range: Displays the current
repeat range
5File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
6Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
7Folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
8Song number indicator
Shows the number of the song playing in the
selected list.
9Song title indicator
Shows the title of the current song.
aArtist name indicator
Shows the artist name for the current song.
bAlbum title indicator
Shows the title of the album for the current
song.
Using the touch panel keys
32
4
5
6
7
8
1
1Switch the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play.
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) —ROM (com-
pressed audio file) —DivX (DivX video files)
pThis touch panel key appears only when
playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types.
2Recall equalizer curves
Playing music files on ROM
En
88
Chapter
10
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
3Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
4Select the previous or next folder
pTouching these keys enables you to se-
lect the previous or next folder and play-
back the first track on the folder. You
cannot select a folder that does not
have a compressed audio file.
5Skip the track forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
track. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current track. Touching it again will skip
to the previous track.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pFast rewind stops when it reaches the
beginning of the first file on the repeat
range.
pIn the case of compressed audio files,
there is no sound on fast rewind or for-
ward.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
6Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
7Shuffle All
All of the songs in the disc can be played at
random by touching only one key.
pIf the disc contains a mixture of various
media file types, all tracks within the
current part (“CD”or “ROM”) are played
randomly.
p[Shuffle All] is not available for AVIC-
X710BT.
pTo cancel random play, switch [Ran-
dom]to[Off] on the “Function”menu.
8Display the map screen
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles or
folder names on a disc. Touch a folder on the
list to view its contents. You can play a track
on the list by touching it.
1 Touch [List].
2 Touch the folder that you want to view.
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
Touching displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed, cannot be used.
pIf the selected folder does not contain any
playable track, the track list is not dis-
played.
3 Touch the track you want to play.
pTo cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].
Browsing embedded text
information
Text information recorded in a compressed
audio file disc can be displayed.
%Touch .
The next piece of information is displayed.
!Album Title : (album title)
!Track Title : (track title)
!Folder Title : (folder title)
!File Name : (file name)
!Artist Name : (artist name)
If no information has been recorded for the
item, none can be displayed.
Playing music files on ROM
En 89
Chapter
10
Playing music files on ROM
pIf you operate no functions for about 30 sec-
onds, the display automatically returns to
the ordinary display.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “ROM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12 3
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Disc —Repeats all compressed audio
files
!Track —Repeats just the current track
!Folder —Repeats the current folder
pIf you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
pIf you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [Track], the repeat play range
changes to [Folder].
pWhen [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that
folder.
pWhen playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within the cur-
rently playing data session even if [Disc]
is selected.
2Play tracks in a random order
Touching [Random] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When using ROM, the tracks in
the current repeat play range are randomly
played.
pIf you turn [Random]to[On] when the
repeat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
3Scan folders and tracks
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each track. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
Touching [Scan] switches between [On]
and [Off]. When you find the track you
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.
pAfter completion of track or folder scan-
ning, normal playback of the tracks will
begin again.
pIf you turn [Scan]to[On] when the re-
peat play range is set to [Track], the re-
peat play range changes to [Folder]
automatically.
pIf you turn [Scan]to[On] while the re-
peat play range is set to [Disc], scan
play is performed for only the first tracks
of each folder.
Playing music files on ROM
En
90
Chapter
10
You can play a DVD-Video using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes operations for playing a DVD-Video.
pAVIC-X710BT cannot play DVDs.
Reading the screen
123
4
5678
9
a
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number and audio lan-
guage currently selected.
3Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
4Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch”(Multi-channel).
5Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
6Subtitle language indicator
Shows the subtitle language currently se-
lected.
7Digital sound format indicator
Shows which digital sound format (surround
sound format) has been selected.
8Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current title.
9Viewing angle indicator
Shows what viewing angle has been selected.
aSubtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently
selected.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
a
12
3
5
6
7
b9
8
4
Playback screen (page2)
f
21
c
d
6
7
bg9
e
Playback screen (page3)
12
h
i
j
6
k
7
b9
8
pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
Playing a DVD-Video
En 91
Chapter
11
Playing a DVD-Video
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on page 94.
3Display the DVD menu
You can display the menu by touching [Menu]
or [TOP M.] while a disc is playing. Touching
either of these keys again lets you start play-
back from the location selected from the
menu. For details, refer to the instructions pro-
vided with the disc.
4Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching it again
will skip to the previous chapter.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
5Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
6Switch the display
Touching [Disp] changes the indication on the
information plate as follows:
Disc information display —Repeat range and
L/R select display
7Display the map screen
8Display the DVD menu keypad
=For details, refer to Using DVD menu by
touch panel keys on page 94.
9Switch next page of touch panel keys
aStop playback
bHide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
cSkip the title forward or backward
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous
title.
dFrame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on page 94.
=For details, refer to Slow motion playback
on page 94.
eFast reverse or forward
Touch [m]or[n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
If you touch and hold [m]or[n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m]or[n].
fSearching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
pFor details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on the next page.
gPerform an operation (such as resuming)
that is stored on the disc
When using a DVD that has a point recorded
that indicates where to return to, the DVD re-
turns to the specified point and begins play-
back from that point.
hChange the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
iChange the viewing angle (Multi-angle)
Each touch of [Angle] switches between view-
ing angles.
pDuring playback of a scene shot from
multiple angles, the angle icon is
displayed. Turn the angle icon display
on or off using the “DVD Setup”menu.
=For details, refer to Setting the angle icon
display on page 103.
jChange audio language and audio sys-
tems (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio languages and audio systems.
pDTS audio cannot be output, so select
an audio setting other than DTS.
pDisplay indications such as MPEG-A
and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the
setting, playback may not use the same
audio system as that indicated.
kEntering the numerical commands
=For details, refer to Direct number search
on the next page.
Playing a DVD-Video
En
92
Chapter
11
Resuming playback (Bookmark)
The Bookmark function lets you resume play-
back from a selected scene the next time the
disc is loaded.
Touching [B.Mark]:
You can bookmark one point for each of up to
five discs. If you try to memorize another point
for the same disc, the oldest bookmark will be
overwritten by the newest one.
pTo clear the bookmark on a disc, touch and
hold [B.Mark] during playback.
Press and hold down the EJECT button:
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by
pressing and holding down the EJECT button.
The next time you load the same disc, play-
back will resume from the bookmarked point.
When you newly bookmark a point with this
method, any previously bookmarked point(s)
will be overwritten.
pFor playback, the point bookmarked
with this method is given priority over
the point bookmarked by using
[B.Mark].
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
pChapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For titles, chapters
!To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in
order.
For time (time search)
!To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
pTo cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
Direct number search
You can use this function when you need to
enter a numerical command during DVD play-
back.
1 Touch [0-9].
2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
number.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
Operating the DVD menu
You can operate the DVD menu by touching
the menu item on the screen directly.
pThis function may not work properly with
some DVD disc content. In that case, use
touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu.
1 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
2 Touch [TOP M.] or [Menu] to display
touch panel keys to operate the DVD
menu.
Playing a DVD-Video
En 93
Chapter
11
Playing a DVD-Video
3 Touch the desired menu item.
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys
If items on the DVD menu appear at the bot-
tom of the screen, the touch panel keys may
overlay them. If so, select an item using those
touch panel keys.
1 Touch [a], [b], [c]or[d] to select the
desired menu item.
Play All
Chapter
Staff / Cast
Audio
Subtitle
Angle
pIf the touch panel keys for DVD menu selec-
tion disappear, touching anywhere on the
screen, then touching displays them
again.
2 Touch [Enter].
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
The way to display the menu differs depending
on the disc.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
%Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1 Touch and hold [r] until is dis-
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
pTo return to normal playback, touch [f].
2 Touch [q]or[r] to adjust playback
speed during slow motion playback.
Each time you touch [q]or[r] it changes
the speed in four steps in the following order:
1/16 f1/8 f1/4 f1/2
pThere is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “DVD-V”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch [Func].
12 3
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Title —Repeats just the current title
!Chapter —Repeats just the current
chapter
!Disc —Plays throughout the current
disc
pIf you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].
2Selecting audio output
Playing a DVD-Video
En
94
Chapter
11
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM
audio, you can switch the audio output.
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-
sired audio output appears in the display.
Each touch of [L/R Select] changes the set-
tings as follows:
!L+R —Left and right
!L—Left
!R—Right
!Mix —Mixing left and right
pThis function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
3DVD setup adjustments
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD
Setup menu on page 103.
Playing a DVD-Video
En 95
Chapter
11
Playing a DVD-Video
You can play a DVD-VR (DVD Video Recording
Format) disc using the built-in drive of the na-
vigation system. This section describes opera-
tions for DVD-VR discs.
pAVIC-X710BT cannot play DVD-VR discs.
Reading the screen
1345678
9
2
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected.
3Title number indicator
Shows the title number currently playing.
4Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch”(Multi-channel).
5Chapter number indicator
Shows the chapter currently playing.
6Play mode indicator
Shows the current play mode.
=For details, refer to Switch the play-
back mode on page 98.
7Digital sound format indicator
Shows which digital sound format (surround
sound format) has been selected.
8Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current title.
9Mixing condition indicator
Shows the current mixing condition.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
12
9bc
a
3
6
4
5
7
8
Playback screen (page2)
12
ia c
d
e
7
8
f
g
h
pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on page 99.
3cCM Back/CM Skip d
=For details, refer to Using the short-
time skip function on page 98.
4Switch the playback mode
=For details, refer to Switch the play-
back mode on page 98.
5Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching [o] once skips to the
start of the current chapter. Touching it again
will skip to the previous chapter.
Playing a DVD-VR disc
En
96
Chapter
12
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
6Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
7Switch the display
Touching [Disp] changes the information as
follows:
Disc information display —Repeat range dis-
play
8Display the map screen
9Display the title list
Displays the title list recorded on the disc.
aSwitch next page of touch panel keys
bStop playback
cHide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
dChange audio tracks (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks.
pDisplay indications such as MPEG-A
and Mch indicate the audio system re-
corded on the DVD. Depending on the
setting, playback may not use the same
audio system as that indicated.
eSkip the title forward or backward
Touching [d] skips to the start of the next title.
Touching [c] skips to the start of the previous
title.
fChange the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
gFrame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on the next page.
=For details, refer to Slow motion playback
on the next page.
hFast reverse or forward
Touch [m]or[n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
If you touch and hold [m]or[n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m]or[n].
iSearching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
=For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on this page.
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for the scene you want by spe-
cifying a title or a chapter, and the time.
pChapter search and time search are not
possible when disc playback has been
stopped.
1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Title]
(title), [Chapter] (chapter), [Time] (time).
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For titles, chapters
!To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in
order.
For time (time search)
!To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
Playing a DVD-VR disc
En 97
Chapter
12
Playing a DVD-VR disc
!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
pTo cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
Switch the playback mode
You have two methods for playing DVD-VR
discs; Original (original) and Playlist (play-
list).
pTitles created with DVD recorders are
called original. Those based on original, re-
arranged titles are called playlist. Playlists
are created on DVD-R/-RW discs.
%Touch [Mode Change] to switch the
play mode.
If the play mode is changed, playback starts
from the beginning of the selected play mode.
Using the short-time skip function
This function enables you to skip over your
specified interval on the video playback. This
is useful to skip commercials on your recorded
DVD-VR disc.
%To skip progressively backward or for-
ward, touch [cCM Back] or [CM Skip d].
Each touch of [cCM Back]or[CM Skip d]
changes steps in the following order:
cCM Back
5 sec. —15 sec. —30 sec. —1 min. —2 min.
—3 min. —0 sec.
CM Skip d
30 sec. —1 min. —1.5 min. —2 min. —3 min.
—5 min. —10 min. —0 sec.
Playing by selecting from the
title list
You can select and play the title you want from
the list.
1 Touch [List] on the playback screen.
2 Touch the title to play from the list.
pTouching or switches the selection to
the next or previous page in the list.
3 To return to the previous screen, touch
[List].
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
%Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1 Touch and hold [r] until is dis-
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
pTo return to normal playback, touch [n]
or [m], etc.
2 Touch [r] to adjust playback speed
during slow motion playback.
Each touch of [r] changes the speed in four
steps as below:
1/16 d1/8 d1/4 d1/2
pThere is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Playing a DVD-VR disc
En
98
Chapter
12
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “DVD-VR”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch [Func].
Function menu
12 3
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Title —Repeats just the current title
!Chapter —Repeats just the current
chapter
!Disc —Plays throughout the current
disc
pIf you perform chapter (title) search, fast
forward/rewind or slow motion playback,
the repeat play range changes to [Disc].
2Selecting audio output
When playing DVDs recorded with LPCM
audio, you can switch the audio output.
Touch [L/R Select] repeatedly until the de-
sired audio output appears in the display.
!L+R —Left and right
!L—Left
!R—Right
!Mix —Mixing left and right
pThis function is not available when disc
playback has been stopped.
3DVD setup adjustments
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD
Setup menu on page 103.
Playing a DVD-VR disc
En 99
Chapter
12
Playing a DVD-VR disc
You can play a DivX disc using the built-in
drive of the navigation system. This section de-
scribes that operations.
pAVIC-X710BT cannot play DivX files.
Reading the screen
9
1
3
4568 2 7
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Audio track indicator
Shows the audio track number currently se-
lected.
3Folder number indicator
Shows the folder number currently playing.
4Audio channel indicator
Shows the current audio channel type, such
as “Mch”(Multi-channel).
5File number indicator
Shows the file number currently playing.
6Subtitle number indicator
Shows the subtitle number currently selected.
7Digital sound format indicator
Shows the digital sound format (surround
sound format) currently selected.
8Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time of the current
file.
9Repeat range indicator
Shows which repeat range has been
selected.
Using the touch panel keys
Playback screen (page1)
12
89 ab
3
4
5
6
7
Playback screen (page2)
21
c
3
d
e
f
6
7
b9g
pWith some discs, the icon 9may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on page 102.
3Select the previous or next folder
Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired folder.
4Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
5Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
Playing a DivX video
En
100
Chapter
13
6Switch the information
Touching [Disp] changes the content of the in-
formation panel as follows:
Disc information display —Current folder dis-
play —File name display
7Display the map screen
8Switch the media file type played
When playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types, you can switch be-
tween media files types to play.
Touch [Media] repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) —ROM (com-
pressed audio file) —DivX (DivX video files)
pThis touch panel key appears only when
playing a disc containing a mixture of
various media file types.
9Switch next page of touch panel keys
aStop playback
bHide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
cChange audio tracks (Multi-audio)
Each touch of [Audio] switches between
audio tracks.
dChange the subtitle (Multi-subtitle)
Each touch of [S.Title] switches between the
subtitle languages.
eFrame-by-frame playback (or slow-motion
playback)
=For details, refer to Frame-by-frame play-
back on this page.
=For details, refer to Slow motion playback
on this page.
fFast reverse or forward
Touch [m]or[n] to perform fast reverse or
forward.
If you touch and hold [m]or[n] for five
seconds, fast reverse/fast forward continues
even if you release either of these keys. To re-
sume playback at a desired point, touch
[f], [m]or[n].
gSearching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
=For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on this page.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time
during playback.
%Touch [r] during playback.
Each time you touch [r], you move ahead
one frame.
To return to normal playback, touch [f].
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
%Touch and hold [r] until is dis-
played during playback.
The icon is displayed, and forward slow
motion playback begins.
pTo return to normal playback, touch [n]
or [m], etc.
pThere is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
pWith some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
pReversed slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing a folder or a file, and the time.
pTime search are not possible when disc
playback has been stopped.
1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder]
(folder), [File] (file), [Time] (time).
Playing a DivX video
En 101
Chapter
13
Playing a DivX video
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
For folders, files
!To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in
order.
For time (time search)
!To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
pTo cancel the input numbers, touch
[Clear].
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “DivX”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch [Func].
Function menu
12
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!File —Repeat just the current file
!Folder —Repeat just the current folder
!Disc —Plays throughout the current
disc
pIf you select another folder during repeat
play, the repeat play range changes to
[Disc].
pIf you perform fast forward/rewind dur-
ing [File], the repeat play range changes
to [Folder].
pWhen [Folder] is selected, it is not pos-
sible to play back a subfolder of that
folder.
pWhen playing discs with compressed
audio files and audio data (CD-DA), re-
peat play is performed within DivX vi-
deos even if [Disc] is selected.
2DVD setup adjustments
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD
Setup menu on the next page.
Playing a DivX video
En
102
Chapter
13
Configure the DVD-Video/DVD-VR/DivX player.
Displaying DVD Setup menu
1 Play the disc that contains DVD-Video,
DVD-VR or DivX.
2 Touch [DISC] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the normal playback screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
3 Touch [Func].
The “Function”menu appears.
4 Touch [DVD Setup].
5 Touch the desired function.
Setting the top-priority
languages
You can assign the top-priority language to the
top-priority subtitle, audio and menu in initial
playback. If the selected language is recorded
on the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are dis-
played or output in that language.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on this page.
2 Touch [Language].
You can select the language preference of the
subtitle, audio, and menus.
3 Touch the key next to [Subtitle Lan-
guage], [Audio Language] or [Menu Lan-
guage].
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
4 Touch the desired language.
When you select [Others], a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
[Enter].
=Refer to Language code chart for DVDs on
page 106.
pIf the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
pYou can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching [S.Title]or[Audio]
during playback.
pEven if you use [S.Title]or[Audio]to
switch the subtitle or audio language, this
does not affect the settings here.
Setting the angle icon display
You can set the angle icon to display in
scenes where the angle can be switched.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on this page.
2 Touch [Multi Angle].
Touching [Multi Angle] switches between
[On] and [Off].
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
En 103
Chapter
14
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
Setting the aspect ratio
There are two kinds of displays. A wide screen
display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect)
of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect
of 4:3. If you use a regular rear display with a
TV aspect of 4:3, you can set the aspect ratio
suitable for your rear display. (We recommend
use of this function only when you want to fit it
to the rear display.)
pWhen using a regular display, select either
“Letter Box”or “Panscan”. Selecting
“16:09”may result in an unnatural picture.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [TV Aspect].
Each touch of [TV Aspect] changes the setting
as follows:
!16:09 —Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
!Letter Box —The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
!Panscan —The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
pWhen playing discs that do not have a pan-
scan system, the disc is played back with
[Letter Box] even if you select [Panscan]
setting. Confirm whether the disc package
bears the mark.
pSome discs do not enable changing of the
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s in-
structions.
Setting the parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental
lock to set restrictions so that children cannot
watch violent or adult-oriented scenes. You
can set the parental lock level in steps as de-
sired.
pWhen you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be dis-
played. In this case, playback will begin
when the correct code number is input.
Setting the code number and level
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code
number, parental lock will not operate.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on the previous page.
2 Touch [Parental].
3 Touch the key next to “Parental”.
4 Touch [0] to [9] to input a four digit
code number.
5 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
6 Touch any of [1] to [8] to select the de-
sired level.
The parental lock level is set.
!Level 8 —Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
!Level 7 to Level 2 —Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
!Level 1 —Only playback of discs for chil-
dren is possible
pIf you want to change the parental level al-
ready set, enter the registered code number
and then select the parental level.
pWe recommend that you keep a record of
your code number in case you forget it.
pThe parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, the included literature or the
disc itself. You cannot use parental lock
with discs that do not feature a recorded
parental lock level.
pWith some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which normal
playback resumes. For details, refer to the
disc’s instructions.
pIf you forget the registered code number,
touch [Clear] 10 times on the number input
screen. The registered code number is can-
celed, letting you register a new one.
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
En
104
Chapter
14
Displaying your DivX VOD
registration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand)
content on this navigation system, you first
need to register the unit with your DivX VOD
content provider. You do this by generating a
DivX VOD registration code, which you submit
to your provider.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on page 103.
2 Touch [DivX VOD].
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
pMake a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD
provider.
Setting “Auto Play”
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati-
cally and start playback from the first chapter
of the first title.
pThis function is available for DVD-Video.
pSome DVDs may not operate properly. If
this function is not fully operable, turn this
function off and start playback.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on page 103.
2 Touch [Auto Play].
Touching [Auto Play] switches this setting be-
tween [On] and [Off].
pWhen [Auto Play]is[On], repeat play can-
not be used.
Setting the subtitle file for
DivX
You can select whether to display DivX exter-
nal subtitles or not.
pIf no DivX external subtitle files exist, the
original DivX subtitles are displayed even
when [Custom] is selected.
1 Touch [DVD Setup] on the “Function”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying DVD Setup
menu on page 103.
2 Touch [Subtitle File].
Touching [Subtitle File] switches this setting
between [Original] and [Custom].
pUp to 42 characters can be displayed on
one line. If more than 42 characters are set,
the line breaks and the characters are dis-
played on the next line.
pUp to 126 characters can be displayed on
one screen. If more than 126 characters are
set, the excess characters will not be dis-
played.
pThe DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist.
pUp to three lines can be displayed at
once.
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
En 105
Chapter
14
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
Language code chart for DVDs
Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721
French (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814
German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Rumanian (ro), 1815
Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904
Portuguese (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sango (sg), 1907
Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Shinghalese (si), 1909
Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911
Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912
Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913
Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914
Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915
Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917
Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918
Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919
Aymara (ay), 0125 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920
Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921
Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923
Belorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 Tamil (ta), 2001
Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 Telugu (te), 2005
Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209 Laotian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214 Lithuanian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222 Turkmen (tk), 2011
Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 Tagalog (tl), 2012
Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014
Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 Tongan (to), 2015
Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 Turkish (tr), 2018
Welsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 Tsonga (ts), 2019
Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 Tatar (tt), 2020
Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 Twi (tw), 2023
Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118
Basque (eu), 0521 Burmese (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126
Persian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 Volapük (vo), 2215
Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wolof (wo), 2315
Faroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408
Frisian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om), 1513 Yoruba (yo), 2515
Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu), 2621
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704 Panjabi (pa), 1601
Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl), 1612
DVD-Video, DVD-VR, DivX setup
En
106
Chapter
14
You can play the compressed audio files
stored in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
pIn the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the “external storage
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
“USB storage device”.
pWhen “SD”or “USB”is selected as the AV
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.
Important Notice regarding Volume of
Navigation Voice Guidance when
Playing Audio Files from USB or SD
If music files stored on an external storage de-
vice (USB, SD) are played when the system
guides the route (i.e., a destination has been
selected and the system is routing you to a
destination), the volume of the navigation gui-
dance voice will be the same as the volume of
the music files being played, even if a different
volume level has been selected on “Master”
or “Voice”or “Dynamic Volume”in the
“Sound settings”menu.
Starting procedure
%Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
The source changes and then playback will
start if there is a playable file on the external
storage device.
=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 30.
=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card on page 29.
pIf the external storage device is already set,
touch [USB]or[SD] on the “AV Source”
menu.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
pPlayback is performed in order of folder
number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 001 (root folder),
playback starts from folder 002.)
Reading the screen
135
7
8
9
a
2
6
b
4
pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
pYou can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device.
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Folder number indicator
3Track number indicator
4Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
5File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
6Current folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
7Current file number and total number of
files
Shows the file number currently played and
the total number of playable audio files.
8Track title indicator*
Shows the title of the track currently playing
(when available).
9Artist name indicator*
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
En 107
Chapter
15
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
Shows the artist name currently playing
(when available).
aAlbum title indicator*
Shows the title of the album for the current
track (when available).
bPlayback condition indicator
The marks shown below appears and indi-
cates the current playback condition.
: Scan play
: Random play
: Repeat play
Indicator Meaning
Media Repeat
All audio files in the current
external storage device
(USB, SD) are played repeat-
edly. This is the default con-
dition.
Folder Repeat The current folder is played
repeatedly.
Track Repeat The current file is played re-
peatedly.
Media Random
All audio files in the current
external storage device
(USB, SD) are played in ran-
dom order.
Folder Random
All audio files in the current
folder are played in random
order.
Media Scan
The beginning of each audio
file is played for about 10
seconds.
Folder Scan
The beginning of each track
in the current folder is
played for about 10 seconds.
=For more information, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
pThe information marked with an asterisk (*)
is displayed only when the information has
been encoded on the compressed audio
files. If specific information has not been
encoded on the files, “—” is displayed in-
stead.
Using the touch panel keys
(Music)
12
3
4
6
7
5
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. This touch panel key is
available only when there are both audio and
video files in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
4Select the previous or next folder
Touching [c]or[d] play the first playable file
on the previous or next folder. The folders that
there is no playable files are skipped.
5Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pThere is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
6Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
7Display the map screen
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
En
108
Chapter
15
Selecting a track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles or
folder names on an external storage device
(USB, SD). Touch a folder on the list to view its
contents. Touch a track on the list to play that
track.
1 Touch [List].
2 Touch the folder that you want to view.
The track currently playing is highlighted.
Touching or switches the selection to the
next or previous page in the list.
Touching displays the content of the upper
folder (parent folder). If the uppermost folder
is listed, cannot be used.
pIf the selected folder does not contain any
playable track, the track list is not dis-
played.
3 Touch the track you want to play.
pTo cancel the list screen, touch [Detail].
Browsing embedded text
information
Text information recorded in a compressed
audio file can be displayed.
%Touch .
The next piece of information is displayed.
!Album Title : (album title)
!Track Title : (track title)
!Folder Title : (folder title)
!File Name : (file name)
!Artist Name : (artist name)
pIf the information has not been recorded on
files, nothing may be displayed.
pFor WAV files, only the information marked
with (*) can be displayed.
pIf the characters recorded on the com-
pressed audio file are not compatible with
this navigation system, those characters
may turn into garbled characters.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “USB”or “SD”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12 3
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Media —Repeat all compressed audio
files in the selected external storage de-
vice (USB, SD)
!Track —Repeat just the current track
!Folder —Repeat the current folder
pIf you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in “Track”,
the repeat play range changes to
“Folder”.
2Play tracks in a random order
Random play lets you playback tracks in
random order within the current repeat
range.
Touching [Random] switches between “On”
and “Off”.
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
En 109
Chapter
15
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
pIf you turn [Random]to“On”while the
repeat play range is set to “Track”, the
repeat play range changes to “Folder”
automatically.
3Scan folders and tracks
Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each track. Scan play is performed in the
current repeat play range.
Touching [Scan] switches between “On”
and “Off”. When you find the track you
want, touch [Scan] to turn scan play off.
pAfter all tracks or folders scanning are
finished, normal playback will begin
again.
pIf you turn [Scan]to“On”while the re-
peat play range is set to “Track”, the re-
peat play range changes to “Folder”
automatically.
Playing music files (from USB or SD)
En
110
Chapter
15
You can play the video files stored in the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD).
pIn the following description, the SD mem-
ory card and USB memory device are col-
lectively referred to as the “external storage
device (USB, SD)”. If it indicates the USB
memory device only, it is referred to as the
“USB storage device”.
pWhen “SD”or “USB”is selected as the AV
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.
Important Notice regarding Volume of
Navigation Voice Guidance when
Playing Audio Files from USB or SD
If music files stored on an external storage de-
vice (USB, SD) are played when the system
guides the route (i.e., a destination has been
selected and the system is routing you to a
destination), the volume of the navigation gui-
dance voice will be the same as the volume of
the music files being played, even if a different
volume level has been selected on “Master”
or “Voice”or “Dynamic Volume”in the
“Sound settings”menu.
Starting procedure
%Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
The source changes and then playback will
start if there is a playable file on the external
storage device.
=For details, refer to Plugging in a USB sto-
rage device on page 30.
=For details, refer to Inserting and ejecting an
SD memory card on page 29.
pIf the external storage device is already set,
touch [USB]or[SD] on the “AV Source”
menu.
pPlayback is performed in order of folder
number. Folders are skipped if they con-
tains no playable files. (If there are no play-
able files in folder 001 (root folder),
playback starts from folder 002.)
Reading the screen
1 3
6
54
2
pThis unit may not achieve optimum perfor-
mance with some external storage devices.
pYou can playback the files on a USB sto-
rage device compliant with Mass Storage
Class. For details about the USB Class,
refer to the manual supplied with USB sto-
rage device.
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Folder number indicator
3File number indicator
4Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current track.
5File type indicator
Shows the type of audio file currently playing.
6Current folder name indicator
Shows the folder name currently playing.
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
En 111
Chapter
16
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Using the touch panel keys
(Video)
6
5
21
4
7
3
a98
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. This touch panel key is
available only when there are both audio and
video files in the external storage device (USB,
SD).
4Select the previous or next folder
Touching [c]or[d] play the first playable file
on the previous or next folder. The folders that
there is no playable files are skipped.
5Skip forward or backward
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
file. Touching [o] once skips to the start of
the current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pThere is no sound on fast reverse or for-
ward.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
6Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
7Display the map screen
8Searching for a desired scene and starting
playback from a specified time
=For details, refer to Searching for a speci-
fic scene and starting playback from a
specified time on this page.
9Stop playback
aHide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
Searching for a specific scene
and starting playback from a
specified time
You can search for a desired scene by specify-
ing a folder number, file number or the time.
1 Touch [Search] and then touch [Folder],
[File] or [Time].
2 Touch the keys to input the target num-
ber or time and then touch [Enter].
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
En
112
Chapter
16
For folders, files
!To select 3, touch [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 10, touch [1] and [0] and [Enter]in
order.
For time (time search)
!To select 5 minutes 03 seconds, touch [5],
[0], [3] and [Enter] in order.
!To select 71 minutes 00 seconds, touch [7],
[1], [0], [0] and [Enter] in order.
pTo clear the input numbers, touch
[Clear].
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [USB] or [SD] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “USB”or “SD”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
3 Touch [Func].
pIf the touch panel keys are not shown,
touch anywhere on the screen to display
them.
1
1Repeating play
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!Media —Repeat all video files in the se-
lected external storage device (USB, SD)
!File —Repeat just the current file
!Folder —Repeat the current folder
pIf you skip the file forward or backward
when the repeat play range in “Track”,
the repeat play range changes to
“Folder”.
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
En 113
Chapter
16
Playing video files (from USB or SD)
Using the USB interface cable for iPod en-
ables you to connect your iPod to the naviga-
tion system.
pA USB interface cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)
(sold separately) is required for connection.
Starting procedure
%Connect your iPod.
The source changes and then playback will
start.
=For details, refer to Connecting your iPod on
page 31.
pIf the iPod is already connected, touch
[iPod] on the “AV Source”menu.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
pNo sound or video output if iPod is selected
as AV source, check the setting in “AV1
Input”on the “AV System Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1)on page 163.
Reading the screen
Music
123
9
8
7
6
5
4
Video
1
a
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Shuffle play indicator
Appears when shuffle play is activated.
3Repeat play indicator
Appears when repeat play is activated.
: All-tracks repeat
: One-track repeat
4Album artwork
Album art of the current song is displayed if it
is available.
5Song title (episode) indicator
Shows the title of the current song. When a
podcast is played, the episode is displayed.
6Artist name (podcast title) indicator
Shows the artist name currently playing.
When a podcast is played, the podcast title is
displayed.
7Album title (release date) indicator
Shows the title of the album for the song.
When a podcast is played, the release date is
displayed.
8Play time indicator
Shows the elapsed playing time within the
current song.
9Song number indicator
Shows the number of the song currently play-
ing and total number of songs in the selected
list.
aChapter number indicator
Shows the current chapter number and total
number of chapters when the video with chap-
ters played.
Using an iPod (iPod)
En
114
Chapter
17
pIf characters recorded on the iPod are not
compatible with this navigation system,
they may turn into garbled characters.
Using the touch panel keys
(Music)
43
5
7
8
9
a
1
6
2
1Album artwork
Touch the key to enlarge the album artwork. If
you touch again, the artwork returns to its nor-
mal size.
2Category tabs
Shows the list to narrow down the songs. If
you want to use the list of “Audiobooks”,
“Composers”or “Songs”, touch [Menu]to
display the lists.
3Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
4Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on page 118.
5Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. After you touch the key,
the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback.
pThis touch panel key is available only
when there are both audio and video file
in your iPod.
6Display the top category menu
Touching the key displays the top category be-
fore you use the category tabs. If you select
the song using the category tabs to play,
touching the key displays the previous list.
7Skip back or forward to another song
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
song. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current song. Touching again will skip
to the previous song. When the track with
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back
and forward.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
8Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
9Display the map screen
aShuffle All
All songs (except for the track in “Audiobook-
s”and “Podcasts”) in your iPod can be played
randomly.
pTo cancel the random play, switch
[Shuffle] on the “Function”menu to the
“Off”.
Browsing for a song
Touch an item on list to search for a song and
play it on your iPod.
Narrowing down listed songs
1 Touch your desired category tab to dis-
play the song or track list.
!Playlists (playlists)
!Genres (genres)
!Artists (artists)
!Albums (albums)
!Podcasts (podcasts)
The search screen is displayed.
Using an iPod (iPod)
En 115
Chapter
17
Using an iPod (iPod)
2 Touching or switches the selection
to the next or previous page in the list.
3 Touch the item that you want to refine.
Refine the item until the track title is displayed
on the list.
pTouching [All] on the list includes all op-
tions in the current list. For example, if you
touch [All] after touching [Artists], you can
proceed to the next screen with all artists in
the list selected.
pAfter you select Artists,Albums,or
Genres, go on to touch one of the list to
start playing the first songs in the selected
list and display the next options.
4 On the song (or episode) list, touch the
track you want to play.
pAfter you select the track using this func-
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-
viously selected.
Searching for applicable items
alphabetically
Using the search control displays the page
which includes the first applicable option.
pThis function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only.
Search control
1 Touch your desired category tab to dis-
play the list.
2 Touch the item that you want to refine.
3 Touch [c]or[d] to select the character.
p“THE”or “The”and space at the beginning
of the artist name will be ignored and the
next character will be taken into account
for searching.
4 Touch the character key to display the
page which includes applicable options.
5 On the song (or episode) list, touch the
track you want to play.
Starting the video playback
This navigation system can play video if an
iPod with video capabilities is connected.
1 Touch [Video].
2 Touch one of the categories in that con-
tains the video you want to play.
Video playback will start.
Using an iPod (iPod)
En
116
Chapter
17
3 Touch your desired item on the list to
narrow down them until the video list ap-
pears.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Browsing for a video on this page.
4 On the video list, touch the video you
want to play.
5 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Using the touch panel keys (Video)on this
page.
Using the touch panel keys
(Video)
1 2
3
6
7
98
4
5
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Switch the operation screen
Touching this key switches between the
screen to operate music files and the screen
to operate video files. After you touch the key,
the top category menu appears to let you se-
lect the item for playback.
pThis touch panel key is available only
when there are both audio and video file
in your iPod.
4Display the previous selected list
If you select the video from the list to play
after touching Top Menu, touching the key
displays the previous list. (If you touch Top
Menu again but do not select a video, this key
is disabled until you select a video with the list
next time.)
5Skip back or forward to another song
Touching [p] skips to the start of the next
video. Touching [o] once skips to the start
of the current video. Touching again will skip
to the previous video. When the video with
chapters played, chapter can be skipped back
and forward.
Fast reverse or forward
Touch and hold [o]or[p] to fast rewind
or fast forward.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
6Playback and Pause
Touching [f] switches between playback
and pause.
7Display the map screen
8Display the top category menu for video
Touching the key displays the top category for
video playback.
9Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to display
the touch panel keys again.
Browsing for a video
Touching the item on list allows you to search
for a video and play it in your iPod.
Using an iPod (iPod)
En 117
Chapter
17
Using an iPod (iPod)
Narrowing down a video with the list
1 Touch the category you want.
2 Touching or switches the selection
to the next or previous page in the list.
3 Touch the item that you want to refine.
Refine the item until the track title is displayed
on the list.
4 On the video list, touch the video you
want to play.
pAfter you select the video using this func-
tion, touching [Menu] displays the list pre-
viously selected.
Searching for applicable items
alphabetically
Using the search control displays the page
which includes the first applicable option.
pThis function is available for the alphabeti-
cal list only.
Search control
1 Touch the category you want.
2 Touch the item that you want to refine.
3 Touch [c]or[d] to select the character.
p“THE”or “The”and space at the beginning
of the artist name will be ignored and the
next character will be taken into account
for searching.
4 Touch the character key to display the
page which includes applicable options.
5 On the video list, touch the video you
want to play.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [iPod] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the control screen for “iPod”.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
1234
1Setting repeat play
There are two repeat play types for play-
back.
Each touch of [Repeat] changes the setting
as follows:
!One —Repeats just the current track
!All —Repeats all tracks in the selected
list
2Setting the shuffle play for music
This function shuffles songs or albums and
plays them in random order.
Each touch of [Shuffle] changes the setting
as follows:
!Off —Does not shuffle.
!Songs —Plays back songs in random
order within the selected list
Using an iPod (iPod)
En
118
Chapter
17
!Albums —Selects an album randomly,
and then plays back all songs in that
album in order
3Setting the audiobook play speed
While listening to an audiobook on iPod,
playback speed can be changed.
Each touch of [Audio Book] changes the
setting as follows:
!Normal —Playback in normal speed
!Slower —Playback slower than normal
speed
!Faster —Playback faster than normal
speed
4Playback video in wide screen mode
If the video is compatible with wide screen
format, set [Widescreen]to[On] in order to
view the video image in the wide screen.
Each touch of [Widescreen] changes the
setting as follows:
!On —Outputs the wide-screen video
from iPod
!Off —Outputs the normal-sized video
from iPod
pDisplay size is changed after you
change “Widescreen”setting and select
the video to play.
pThis setting is available only during the
video operation.
Using an iPod (iPod)
En 119
Chapter
17
Using an iPod (iPod)
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (FM).
%Touch [FM] on the “AV Source”menu to
display the “FM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
Reading the screen
7
43
2
1
6
5
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1
to FM3.
3Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4Frequency indicator
5LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
6STEREO indicator
Shows that the frequency selected is being
broadcast in stereo.
7Signal level indicator
Using the touch panel keys
12
3
5
6
4
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Select a preset channel
[c]or[d] can be used to switch preset chan-
nels.
4Perform manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [c]or[d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c]or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c]or[d] briefly.
pIf you touch and hold [c]or[d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
5Select an FM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired FM
band is displayed, FM1,FM2 or FM3.
pThis function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
6Display the map screen
Using the radio (FM)
En
120
Chapter
18
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
%Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detailed information display or preset list
display.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1]to[P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
Preset tuning keys
1 When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
pUp to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the three
FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be stored
in memory.
2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
pYou can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [FM] on the “AV Source”menu to
display the “FM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12
1Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
=For details, refer to this page.
2Tuning in strong signals
=For details, refer to the next page.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM”(best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
1 Touch [BSM].
Using the radio (FM)
En 121
Chapter
18
Using the radio (FM)
2 Touch [Start] to start “BSM”.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
pTo cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1]to[P6].
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1 Touch [Local].
2 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
3 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM.
Level: 1—2—3—4
pThe level “4”setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
Using the radio (FM)
En
122
Chapter
18
You can listen to the radio by using the naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for HD Radio™.
pFor details concerning operation, refer to
the HD Radio tuner’s operation manual.
%Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV
Source”menu to display the “Digital
Radio”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
Reading the screen
1
a
9
7
6
2
345
8
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Band indicator
Shows which band the radio is tuned to: FM1,
FM2, FM3 or AM.
3Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4Frequency indicator
5Multicasting indicator
Shows the number of multicast channels in
the current frequency.
6Signal level indicator
7Blending mode indicator
=For details, refer to Switching the re-
ception mode on page 125.
8Signal type indicator
Shows the type of signal currently being re-
ceived. If a digital broadcasting is received,
“D”appears. Otherwise, “A”appears.
9Seek type indicator
=For details, refer to Switching the seek
mode on page 125.
aDetailed information
=For details, refer to Switching the display
on the next page.
Using the touch panel keys
12
3
4
5
6
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Select a preset channel
[c]or[d] can be used to switch presets chan-
nels.
4Perform manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [c]or[d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c]or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c]or[d] briefly.
pIf you touch and hold [c]or[d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
5Select a band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
band is displayed: FM1,FM2,FM3 or AM.
pThis function is convenient for preparing
different preset lists for each band.
6Display the map screen
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
En 123
Chapter
19
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
%Touch [List] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [List] (or [Detail]) changes the
detailed information display or preset list dis-
play.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1]to[P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
Preset tuning keys
1 When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
pYou can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Switching the display
Desired information can be displayed.
%Touch [Disp].
Touch [Disp] repeatedly to switch between the
following settings:
Call sign or frequency —Artist name —Song
title —Program type
pOnly when the tuner has been tuned in to
an HD Radio broadcasting, display can be
changed.
pWhen the tuner has been tuned in to an HD
Radio broadcasting, default display is chan-
ged into station name instead of
frequency.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [Digital Radio] on the “AV
Source”menu to display the “Digital
Radio”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12 34
1Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
=For details, refer to the next page.
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
En
124
Chapter
19
2Switching the seek mode
=For details, refer to this page.
3Tuning in strong signals
=For details, refer to this page.
4Switching the reception mode
=For details, refer to this page.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM”(best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
%Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
pTo cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1]to[P6].
Switching the seek mode
You can select the method of seek tuning.
%Touch [Seek] to select the desired set-
ting.
![All]:
Seeks stations from both analog and digital
broadcasting.
![HD]:
Seeks from digital broadcasting only.
pIf you select “HD”on this setting while
[Blending] is set to “Analog”, the setting
on [Blending] turns to “Digital-Analog
auto”automatically.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
2 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: 1—2—3—4
AM: 1—2
pThe FM “4”(AM “2”) setting allows recep-
tion of only the strongest stations, while
lower settings let you receive weaker sta-
tions.
Switching the reception mode
If a digital broadcast reception condition gets
poor, the tuner automatically switches to the
analog broadcast of the same frequency level
in default. If you want to prevent a frequent
automatic switching, switch this setting to
[Analog].
%Touch [Blending] to switch the recep-
tion mode.
![Analog]:
Receives analog broadcasting only.
![Digital-Analog auto]:
Automatically switches to the analog broad-
cast of the same frequency level as the digi-
tal broadcast.
pIf you select “Analog”on this setting while
[Seek] is set to “HD”, the setting on [Seek]
turns to “All”automatically.
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
En 125
Chapter
19
Using the HD Radio (Digital Radio)
You can listen to the radio using this naviga-
tion system. This section describes operations
for radio (AM).
%Touch [AM] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “AM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
Reading the screen
5
4
123
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
3Frequency indicator
4Signal level indicator
5LOCAL indicator
Shows when local seek tuning is on.
Using the touch panel keys
12
3
4
5
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the
“Function”menu on the next page.
3Select a preset channel
cor dcan be used to switch presets.
4Perform manual tuning
To tune manually, touch [c]or[d] briefly. The
frequencies move up or down one step at a
time.
Perform seek tuning
To perform seek tuning, touch and hold [c]or
[d] for about one second and release. The
tuner will scan the frequencies until a broad-
cast strong enough for good reception is
found.
pYou can cancel seek tuning by touching
either [c]or[d] briefly.
pIf you touch and hold [c]or[d], you
can skip broadcasting frequencies.
Seek tuning will start as soon as you re-
lease the keys.
pMoving MULTI-CONTROL left or right
enables you to perform the equivalent
operations.
5Display the map screen
Switching between the
detailed information display
and the preset list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
%Touch [Preset] (or [Detail]).
Each touch of [Preset] (or [Detail]) changes
the detailed information display or preset list
display.
Using the radio (AM)
En
126
Chapter
20
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1]to[P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast frequencies for later recall (also
with the touch of a key).
Preset tuning keys
1 When you find a frequency that you
want to store in memory, touch and hold a
preset tuning key [P1] to [P6] until the pre-
set number (e.g., P.ch 1) stops flashing.
The selected radio station has been stored in
memory.
2 The next time you touch the same pre-
set tuning key [P1] to [P6], the radio station
frequencies are recalled from memory.
pYou can also use [c] and [d] to recall radio
stations assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]
to [P6].
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [AM] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “AM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12
1Storing the strongest broadcast fre-
quencies
=For details, refer to this page.
2Tuning in strong signals
=For details, refer to this page.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
“BSM”(best stations memory) lets you auto-
matically store the six strongest broadcast fre-
quencies under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] and, once stored there, you can tune in to
these frequencies with the touch of a key.
%Touch [Start] to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing,
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be
stored under the preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] in order of their signal strength. When
this is complete, BSM stops flashing.
pTo cancel the storage process, touch
[Stop].
pStoring broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have already saved by using [P1]to[P6].
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning allows you to tune in only
those radio stations with sufficiently strong
signals for good reception.
1 Touch [On] to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch [Off].
Using the radio (AM)
En 127
Chapter
20
Using the radio (AM)
2 Touch [cPrev] or [Nextd] to set the sen-
sitivity.
There are two levels of sensitivity for AM.
Level: 1—2
pThe level “2”setting allows reception of only
the strongest stations, while lower settings
let you receive weaker stations.
Using the radio (AM)
En
128
Chapter
20
You can use the navigation system to control
an XM satellite digital tuner, which is sold se-
parately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
XM tuner’s operation manuals. This section
provides information on XM operations with
the navigation system which differs from that
described in the XM tuner’s operation man-
ual.
The following XM satellite digital tuner units
cannot be connected:
GEX-P900XM, GEX-P910XM
Reading the screen
ALL CH MODE
1
2
34 5
9
8
7
6
CATEGORY MODE
5
About the logo for channel name
Only the logo data that is contained in the na-
vigation system can be displayed for each
channel. The logo of a newly established chan-
nel that is not contained cannot be displayed.
When no logo may be displayed, the following
substitute icon is displayed.
Substitute icon
pThe icon of each broadcast station is con-
tained in the hard disk drive based on the
data provided by XM Satellite Radio as of
December 2008.
pAny changes made by XM Satellite Radio
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast sta-
tion in the future may not be supported by
the navigation system, and may cause the
unit to display incorrect icons.
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2XM band indicator
Shows the XM band that has been selected.
3Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4XM channel number indicator
Shows the XM channel number the tuner is
currently tuned to.
5XM channel category
Shows the category of broadcast channel.
6XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in ALL CH MODE, and select a
channel from selected category in
CATEGORY MODE.
7XM station name logo
pThe message “ON THE AIR”disappears
if the navigation system cannot receive
XM tuner reception for some reason.
8XM station name indicator
Shows the XM broadcast station name the
tuner is currently tuned in.
9Detail information
Using the XM tuner
En 129
Chapter
21
Using the XM tuner
Shows the detailed information of the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
Using the touch panel keys
%Touch [XM] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “XM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
ALL CH MODE
a98
231
4
5
6
7
b
CATEGORY MODE
123
c
5
6
7
ba98
1Memorize the current song
=For details, refer to Memorizing the song
on page 132.
2Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
3Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the “Function”
menu on page 133.
4Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
5Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
pIf you keep touching [c]or[d] you can
skip the broadcasting channels.
6Select an XM band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
XM band is displayed: XM 1,XM 2 or
XM 3. This is useful for switching the preset
item.
7Display the map screen
8Preset key for receiving the traffic
audio service
=For details, refer to Using the direct traffic
announcement function on page 132.
9Switching the XM channel select mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel.
ALL CH MODE :
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
CATEGORY MODE:
You can select a channel within a selected
category that you operate this function.
aSelecting an XM channel directly
=For details, refer to Selecting an XM chan-
nel directly on this page.
bSwitching to the list display
You can select the desired channel from the
list display.
=For details, refer to Selecting a channel
from the list on the next page.
cSwitching the channel category
Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
Selecting an XM channel directly
You can select an XM channel directly by en-
tering the desired channel number.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
Using the XM tuner
En
130
Chapter
21
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The XM channel that was entered is selected.
4 Touch .
You return to the previous display.
Displaying the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
([P1]to[P6]), you can easily store up to six
broadcast channels for later recall (also with
the touch of a key).
1 Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2 Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [P1]to[P6] the station is recalled from
memory.
pUp to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
bands can be stored in memory.
pYou can also touch [c]or[d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-
ing the “ALL CH MODE”.
Selecting a channel from the list
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not
only by the channel name but also by the artist
name or song title.
pThe channel list shows all channels during
ALL CH MODE, and the channels included
in the selected category during
CATEGORY MODE. To switch the channel
mode, touch [Mode].
1 Touch [List].
XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of [List] changes the screen as fol-
lows:
Detail information display or Preset list
display —CH name list (Channel name) —
Song title list (Song title) —Artist name list
(Artist name)
2 Touch the desired channel that you
want to listen to.
Touch or to switch to the next page or pre-
vious page.
pDuring CATEGORY MODE, touch [c]or
[d] to switch to another category.
pWhen the list switching operation is started
from the detailed information display, the
preset list appears in the end of the list se-
lection.
Using the XM tuner
En 131
Chapter
21
Using the XM tuner
Using “My Mix”function
“My Mix”function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When the song that matches the mem-
orized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
pA track itself is NOT downloaded. ONLY the
song title and the artist name are memor-
ized.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized to “My Mix”.
%Touch [Memo].
The song title and artist name of current song
you are listening to are memorized, and a con-
firmation message appears.
pThe song title and artist name of up to 12
songs can be memorized. Trying to save
more than 12 songs will result in older ones
being overwritten.
pYou cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when “––––––––”is dis-
played on the title information.
pThis function is invalid for the channel
“000”.
pThe memorized title may not be displayed
correctly depending on the conditions.
pYou can customize the setting for the mem-
orized songs later.
=For more details concerning the opera-
tion, refer to Setting the memorized
songs on the next page.
When the memorized song is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
pIf the memorized song is not checked or
when [Off] is selected on [Alert]on
“MEMO Edit”screen, no alert will be pro-
vided.
=Refer to Setting the memorized songs
on the next page.
pNotification may not be provided depend-
ing on the status of the Navigation System.
pIf there is even a slight difference between
the memorized title and the title of the
song being broadcast, no notification will
be provided even though they are the same
song.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to the memorized “Instant Traf-
fic & Weather”channel by directly calling it up
with [TRAFFIC]. (Only one station can be
memorized.)
Memorizing an “Instant Traffic &
Weather”channel
1 Tune into “Instant Traffic & Weather”
channel.
2 Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-
onds or more.
That “Instant Traffic & Weather”channel will
be memorized.
pEven if you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner together, only one station can be
memorized. The station memorized after-
ward will overwrite the existing one.
Tuning in to the memorized channel
%Touch [TRAFFIC].
pYou can also perform this operation by
touching [TRAFFIC] on the “AV Source”
menu.
pYou can even call up a “Instant Traffic &
Weather”channel from a source other than
the XM source.
pTo cancel the announcement, touch [TRFC
Off] on the screen.
Using the XM tuner
En
132
Chapter
21
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [XM] on the “AV Source”menu
to display the “XM”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
1
1Setting the memorized songs
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can
change the notification setting when the song
is broadcast again. You can enable or disable
notification for each song.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the notification list.
The check mark is removed, and the song title
is excluded from the notification list.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
Touch to toggle the selection.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
songs from the song title list.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch and hold the song you want to
delete.
pTo delete all songs that are memorized,
touch [Delete All].
3 Touch [Yes].
Using the XM tuner
En 133
Chapter
21
Using the XM tuner
You can use the navigation system to control a
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is
sold separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
SIRIUS tuner’s operation manuals. This sec-
tion provides information on SIRIUS opera-
tions with navigation system which differs
from that described in the SIRIUS tuner’s op-
eration manual.
pWhen you use the SiriusConnect universal
tuner (sold separately) with this navigation
system, Pioneer SIRIUS BUS INTERFACE is
required. For details concerning operation,
refer to the owner’s manual of Pioneer SIR-
IUS BUS INTERFACE and SiriusConnect
universal tuner.
Reading the screen
All Ch Mode
1
2
34
7
6
5
Category Mode
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2SIRIUS band indicator
Shows the SIRIUS band that has been se-
lected.
3Preset number indicator
Shows what preset item has been selected.
4SIRIUS channel number indicator
Shows the SIRIUS channel number that the
tuner is tuned to.
5SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all
channels in All Ch Mode, and select a chan-
nel from the selected category in
Category Mode.
=For details, refer to Switch the SIRIUS
channel select mode on the next page.
6SIRIUS station name logo
pThe message “ON THE AIR”disappears
if the navigation system cannot receive
SIRIUS tuner reception for some reason.
7Variable information area
Shows various information about the broad-
cast channel currently being received.
=For more details about the displayed in-
formation, refer to Switch the SIRIUS
display on the next page.
Using the touch panel keys
%Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “SIRIUS”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
All Ch Mode
3 41 2
5
6
7
8
cba9
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En
134
Chapter
22
Category Mode
3 41 2
d
6
7
8
cba9
1Memorize the current song
=For details, refer to Memorizing the song
on the next page.
2Switch the SIRIUS Instant replay mode
=For details, refer to Using the “Instant
Replay”function on page 137.
3Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
4Display the “Function”menu
=For details, refer to Using the “Function”
menu on page 137.
5Recalling channels from the preset
Touch to recall the preset channel.
Storing broadcast stations
You can register the channel currently
being broadcast to the preset list.
6Perform manual tuning
The channels move up or down one at a
time.
pIf you keep touching [c]or[d] you can
skip the broadcasting channels.
7Select a SIRIUS band
Touch [Band] repeatedly until the desired
SIRIUS band is displayed, SIRIUS 1,
SIRIUS 2,orSIRIUS 3. This is useful for
switching the preset.
8Display the map screen
9Preset key for receiving the traffic
audio service
=For details, refer to Using the direct traffic
announcement function on the next
page.
aSwitch the SIRIUS channel select
mode
You can switch the mode between the two
methods for selecting and listing the chan-
nel.
All Ch Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels
when you operate this function.
Category Mode:
You can select a channel within a selected
category that you operate this function.
bSelect a SIRIUS channel directly
=For details, refer to Selecting a SIRIUS
channel directly on this page.
cSwitch the SIRIUS display
Each touch of [Disp] changes the display
information.
Channel number —Channel name —
Channel category —Artist name/feature —
Song/program title —Composer
dSwitch the channel category
Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired cate-
gory.
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Touch [0] to [9] to input the desired
channel number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch [Clear].
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch [Enter].
The SIRIUS channel that was entered se-
lected.
4 Touch .
You return to the previous display.
Display the Radio ID
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is dis-
played.
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En 135
Chapter
22
Using the SIRIUS tuner
1 Touch [Direct].
2 Input [000] and then touch [Enter].
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
With a touch of any of the preset tuning keys
[P1]to[P6], you can easily store up to six
broadcast stations for later recall (also with
the touch of a key).
1 Select the channel that you want to
store in memory.
2 Touch [Preset] to display the preset list.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key [P1]
to [P6].
The selected station has been stored in mem-
ory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key [P1]to[P6] the station is recalled from
memory.
pUp to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIRIUS
bands can be stored in memory.
pYou can also touch [c]or[d] to recall sta-
tions assigned to preset tuning keys [P1]to
[P6] in the detailed information display dur-
ing “All Ch Mode”.
Using “My Mix”function
The MyMix function memorizes the song title
and artist name of the song currently being re-
ceived. When a track that matches the memor-
ized song title and artist name is being
broadcast on a station other than the one you
are listening to, you will be alerted, and you
can switch the station to listen to that song.
pThe track itself is NOT downloaded; only
the song title and the artist name are mem-
orized.
Memorizing the song
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to can be memorized.
%Touch [Memo].
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
pUp to 10 song titles and artist names can be
memorized.
pYou cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name when “––––––––”is dis-
played on the title information.
pYou cannot memorize the song title or the
artist name of channel “000”.
pThe memorized title may not be displayed
correctly.
When the memorized song is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch [Yes] to switch to that station and listen
to that track.
pIf the alert for the song is “Off”or [Alert
Off] is selected, no notification will be pro-
vided even when that song is broadcast.
=For details, refer to Setting the memor-
ized songs on page 138.
pNotification may not be provided depend-
ing on the situation of the Navigation Sys-
tem.
=For details, refer to Selecting the songs
to alert on page 138.
pIf there is even a slight difference between
the memorized title and the title of the
track being broadcast, no notification will
be provided even though they are the same
song.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel
by directly calling it up with the [TRAFFIC]
(Only one station can be memorized).
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En
136
Chapter
22
Memorizing an traffic channel
1 Tune in to a traffic channel.
2 Touch and hold [TRAFFIC] for two sec-
onds or more.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
pEven if you use this with the XM satellite
radio tuner, only one station can be memor-
ized. The station memorized afterward will
overwrite the existing one.
pThe channels 000 can not be memorized.
Tuning in to the memorized channel
%Touch [TRAFFIC].
pYou can also perform this operation by
touching [TRAFFIC] on the “AV Source”
menu.
pTo cancel a traffic announcement, touch
[TRFC Off].
Using the “Instant Replay”function
The “Instant Replay”function allows you to
replay the stored broadcast on the SIRIUS
tuner (if the tuner capable for this function).
As soon as you tune to a channel, the SIRIUS
tuner automatically begins storing the broad-
cast. It can store approximately up to 44 min-
utes previous (depending on the selected
channel and the memory capacity of con-
nected tuner).
1 Touch [Instant Replay] on the SIRIUS
screen to activate the “Instant Replay”
mode.
2 Touch keys for “Instant Replay”.
[o]
Return to the start of the current
song or program. Touching again
will skip back to the previous song
or program.
[o] and hold Fast reverses.
[p]Forwards play to the next song or
program
[p] and hold Fast-forwards.
[f]Touching [f] switches between
playback and pause.
pDuring “Instant Replay”mode, each touch
of [Disp] changes the display information
as follows;
Time position —Channel number —Chan-
nel name —Channel category —Artist
name/feature —Song/program title —
Composer
pYou cannot replay the broadcast prior to the
beginning of stored data.
Using the “Function”menu
1 Touch [SIRIUS] on the “AV Source”
menu to display the “SIRIUS”screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Touch [Func].
12 3
1Setting the memorized songs
=For details, refer to the next page.
2Using the Game Alert function
=For details, refer to the next page.
3Displaying Game Information
=For details, refer to page 139.
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En 137
Chapter
22
Using the SIRIUS tuner
Setting the memorized songs
Selecting the songs to alert
Display the song title list memorized for the
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change
the setting of the notification when the song is
broadcast again. You can enable or disable no-
tification for each song.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch [cPrev] or [Next d] to select the
desired song.
3 Touch [On/Off] to turn the setting on.
When the alert for the song is activated, [ON]
appears at the beginning of the selected title.
pTouch [On/Off] again to turn the setting off.
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when
you want to turn alerts off temporarily without
changing each memorized song.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
pTouch to toggle the selection.
Deleting the memorized songs
You can delete each one of the memorized
tracks from the song title list.
1 Touch [Memo].
2 Touch [cPrev] or [Next d] to select the
song title that you want to delete.
3 Touch [Delete] when the song you
want to delete is displayed.
A message will appear asking you to confirm
the deletion.
4 Touch [Yes].
Using the Game Alert function
Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when
games involving your favorite sports teams are
about to start. To use this function you need to
store the teams you want to follow in advance.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
2 Touch [cPrev] or [Next d] to select the
league.
3 Touch [cPrev] or [Next d] to select the
team.
4 Touch [On/Off].
The team displayed as [ON] is the alert target.
pWhen the selected team is excluded from
the alert target, the team is displayed as
[OFF]. Up to 12 teams can be selected.
When you have already made 12 team se-
lections, “FULL”is displayed and additional
team selection is not possible. In this case,
first delete the team selection and then try
again.
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En
138
Chapter
22
5 Touch [Alert On].
Changing the alert setting
You can enable or disable the alert for selected
items. This function is useful when to want to
turn the alert off temporarily without changing
the setting of each selected team.
1 Touch [Game Alert].
2 Touch [Alert On] or [Alert Off].
pTouch to toggle the selection.
When a game involving one of your
teams is broadcast
A message is displayed. Touch [Jump]to
switch the station, and you can view the game
information. If you touch [Stay], the channel
does not switch.
pAlerts may not be provided depending on
the status of the navigation system.
Displaying Game Information
An alert will be displayed when a game with
the team you selected is about to start (or is
currently under way). You can also display
game information and changes to the broad-
cast channel.
pThe Game Information function is available
when [Alert]is[On]in“Game Alert”.
1 Touch [Game Info].
2 Touch [Prev] or [Next] to view the game
score information which is registered.
pThe game score will be updated automati-
cally.
pTouch [Tune To] to switch to the channel
that broadcasts the displayed game.
pIf you have not made any team selections,
“Not Set”is displayed.
pWhen no games involving your favorite
teams are currently being played
“NO GAME”is displayed.
Using the SIRIUS tuner
En 139
Chapter
22
Using the SIRIUS tuner
You can display “video image”output by AV1
Input or AV2 Input to the screen of the navi-
gation system. For details of the connection
method, refer to “Installation Manual”.
CAUTION
For safety reasons, video images cannot be
viewed while your vehicle is in motion. To view
video images, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
Using AV1
You can display “video image”output by the
equipment connected to “AV1 Input”.
1 Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Setting video input 1
(AV1)on page 163.
2 Touch [AV1] on the “AV Source”menu.
The image is displayed on the screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
Using AV2
You can display “video image”output by the
equipment connected to “AV2 Input”.
1 Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Setting video input 2
(AV2)on page 163.
2 Touch [AV2] on the “AV Source”menu.
The image is displayed on the screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
Using the touch panel keys
%Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
1
2 3
1Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
2Hide the touch panel keys
Touching [Hide] hides the touch panel
keys. Touch anywhere on the LCD screen to
display the touch panel keys again.
3Display the map screen
Using AV input
En
140
Chapter
23
The term “external unit”refers to future
Pioneer devices that are not currently planned
for, or to devices that allow control of basic
functions although they are not fully con-
trolled by the navigation system. Two external
units can be controlled by this navigation sys-
tem. When two external units are connected,
the navigation system allocates them as exter-
nal unit 1 or external unit 2.
For details of the connection method, refer to
“Installation Manual”.
For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit opera-
tions with the navigation system that differ
from those described in the external unit’s op-
eration manual.
pOperation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the exter-
nal unit may not respond.)
Reading the screen
3
12
1Source icon
Shows which source has been selected.
2External unit indicator
Displays the information that is sent by con-
nected external units.
3Auto/Manual mode indicator
Shows the current mode.
Using the touch panel keys
%Touch [EXT1] or [EXT2] on the “AV
Source”menu to select the external unit.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2
4
5
3
1
76
1Send a band command
Touch to send a band command to the ex-
ternal unit.
pOperation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases, the
external unit may not respond.)
2Recall equalizer curves
=For details, refer to Recalling equalizer
curves on page 160.
3Send an [a],[b],[c],or[d]command
Touch to operate the external unit.
pOperation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
4Switching between automatic and man-
ual function
You can turn automatic and manual func-
tion on or off.
You can switch between Auto and Manual
functions of the external unit connected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
pOperating commands set for Auto and
Manual operations vary depending on
the external unit connected.
5Display the map screen
6Send a 1key to 6key command
Using the external unit (EXT1,EXT2)
En 141
Chapter
24
Using the external unit (EXT1,EXT2)
The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to 1
key —6key.
pOperation varies depending on the exter-
nal unit connected. (In some cases,
some functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.)
7Use F1 —F4 to operate the external unit
The external unit can be operated by trans-
mitting the operating commands set to F1
—F4.
pThe operating commands set to F1 —
F4 vary depending on the external unit.
pSome functions may not be used until
you touch and hold the key.
Using the external unit (EXT1,EXT2)
En
142
Chapter
24
The options in the “Navi
Settings”menu
Basic operations in the “Navi
Settings”menu
Preferences related to the navigation functions
can be set.
A method for changing the volume setting for
the navigation guidance and beep is described
here, along with an operational example.
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”, and then touch [Settings].
2 Touch [Navi Settings].
The “Navi Settings”menu appears.
3 Touch [Sound settings].
The “Sound settings”menu appears.
4 Use the tool assigned to the desired op-
tion to change the settings.
23
1
1Slider
Change the value by touching the desired
point on the bar or dragging the slider to
the desired point.
2Detailed setup key
Displays the screen for setting the prefer-
ences in detail.
3On-off control
Touching [On]or[Off] enables activation or
deactivation of this function.
5 Touch to return to the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
GPS & Time Settings
Indicates the connection status of the GPS an-
tenna, its reception sensitivity, and from how
many satellites the signal is being received
from.
%Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the
“Navi Settings”menu.
The “GPS Status”screen appears.
Customizing preferences
En 143
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
4 5
12
3
1Positions of the GPS constellation being re-
ceived by the navigation system
Color Signal com-
munication
Used in posi-
tioning
Green Yes Yes
Gray Yes No
Red No No
2Shows the current comprehensive accu-
racy, altitude and speed.
3Shows each satellite’s signal strength.
4Shows the connection status or reception
condition of GPS antenna.
Color Condition
Green 3D reception (Normal positional
accuracy)
Yellow 2D reception (lower positional ac-
curacy)
Red Connected and no reception
Black
with x No connection
5Shows the GPS reception status. A blinking
green lamp indicates whether positioning is
works normally. If the lamp lights up in an-
other color, there is a problem related with
GPS reception. In such case, check whether
the connection and installation are correct.
Time Settings
Use the “Time Settings”screen to set the
time manually.
1 Touch [GPS & Time Settings] on the
“Navi Settings”menu.
The “GPS Status”screen appears.
2 Touch [Time Settings].
The “Time Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Auto Correction”
Synchronizes the internal clock of this navi-
gation system with the accurate time trans-
mitted from GPS (GMT). Changing this
preference allows you to set the time manu-
ally.
CAUTION
Turning “Auto Correction”to “Off”dis-
ables the automatic change to the appropri-
ate time zone. Note that the proper route
may not be calculated if the time you set
does not match the time zone of the area
that your route passes through.
[On]:
Corrects the current time by changing the
time zone automatically according to this
system’s whereabouts.
[Off]:
Corrects the current time according to the
settings on “Time Zone”and “Time”.
!“Time Zone”
Enables you to set the time zone manually.
Touch the key to show the list and then
touch the current time zone.
Customizing preferences
En
144
Chapter
25
!“Time”
Enables you to adjust the time difference by
one hour. Touch aor bto adjust it.
p“Time Zone”and “Time”are activated
only when [Off] is selected.
POI Settings
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [POI Settings].
The “POI Settings”screen appears.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
POI display settings on page 150.
3D Settings
The 3D map screen settings can be custo-
mized.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [3D Settings].
The “3D Visual Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Landmarks”
You can select whether to draws or refrain
from drawing graphical 3D landmarks on
the map.
!“Elevated Roads”
You can select whether to draws or refrain
from drawing elevated roads, interchanges,
and bridges on the map.
!“Terrain Detail Level”
[High], [Medium], [Low]:
Draws the terrain (e.g. mountain chains) on
the map with the selected detail level.
[Off]:
Does not draw the terrain on the map.
Map Settings
The general settings related with a map screen
can be customized.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [Map Settings].
The “Map Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
![Map color]
Enables you to define the map color for day-
time and nighttime use. Touch this key to
show the next screen.
“Daylight color profile:”
The daytime map color can be set. Touch
the key and select the desired profile from
the list.
“Night color profile:”
The nighttime map color can be set. Touch
the key and select the desired profile from
the list.
!“Night mode”
Changes the settings for the nighttime
map.
[Automatic]:
Switches the map color defined under
“Map color”automatically between day-
time and nighttime.
Customizing preferences
En 145
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
[Night]:
Always displays the map in the color de-
fined on “Night color profile:”.
[Day]:
Always displays the map in the color de-
fined on “Daylight color profile:”.
!“Elevation on 2D Map”
You can select whether to draws or refrain
from drawing the terrain with a realistic
landscape on the map, such as a green
space, water place, undulating surface.
!“Show Street Labels”
Shows or hides street names and city
names.
!“Full Screen Map”
Shows/hides the “Multi-Info window”and
“Second manoeuvre arrow”.
Displayed Info
Allows you to select what options you want to
display on each part of the “Multi-Info win-
dow”.
pThe estimated time of arrival is an ideal
value that the navigation system computes
internally as the route is calculated. The es-
timated time of arrival should be read just
as a reference value, and does not guaran-
tee arrival at the time indicated.
A method for changing the value of Top field:
is described here along with an operational ex-
ample.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [Displayed Info].
The “Displayed Info”screen appears.
3 Touch the key on the right of “Top
field:”to display the options.
4 Touch your desired option.
Smart Zoom
Enables the navigation system to zoom in
automatically when you approach a guidance
point and zoom out after you pass through it.
You can setup the behavior while “Smart
Zoom”is activated.
pWhen no route is set, the navigation system
will simply zoom in or out depending on
your speed.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
vate “Smart Zoom”.
Touching allows you to enter the detailed
setting screen only when [On] has been se-
lected.
Customizing preferences
En
146
Chapter
25
Available options;
!“Zoom-in limit:”
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-in beha-
vior.
!“Zoom-out limit:”
Allows you to set the limit for zoom-out be-
havior.
!“Restore Smart Zoom”
Allows you to set whether “Smart Zoom”is
to be reactivated after changing the map
scale, tilt, or rotation.
Also, enables you to set how soon “Smart
Zoom”interval will be reactivated after
completion of the operations described pre-
viously.
!“Zoom In After Find”
Shows the “Map Confirmation Screen”with
the preset map scale after you have
searched for a position using one of the
methods on the “Destination Menu”.
Overview Mode
Enables the navigation system to zoom out
automatically up to the selected map scale
when the next guidance point is distant.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
vate “Overview Mode”.
Touching allows you to enter the detailed
setting screen only when [On] has been se-
lected.
Available options;
!“Route event distance for Overview
mode:”
Allows you to set a distance to activate
“Overview Mode”. The map starts zoom-
ing out when the distance to the next gui-
dance point is further than the distance set
here.
!“Overview zoom level:”
Allows you to set the map scale for zoom-
out behavior in “Overview Mode”.
Manage Track Logs
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Recording your travel history on page 152.
Route
The settings related to route calculation can
be customized.
%Touch [Route] on the “Navi Settings”
menu.
The “Route Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Method:”
Customizing preferences
En 147
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
Determines which condition takes priority
for route calculation.
[Fast]:
Calculates a route with the shortest travel
time to your destination as a priority.
[Short]:
Calculates a route with the shortest dis-
tance to your destination as a priority.
[Easy]:
Calculates a route to your destination with
the fewest turning points possible as a
priority.
[Economical]:
Calculates a route on the basis of least fuel
consumption.
!“U-turn penalty:”
Allows you to limit the distance increase for
U-turns.
!“Unpaved Roads”
[On]:
Calculates a route which does not avoid un-
paved roads.
[Off]:
Calculates a route which avoids unpaved
roads as far as possible.
!“Highways”
[On]:
Calculates a route which does not avoid
freeways.
[Off]:
Calculates a route which avoids freeways
as far as possible.
!“Ferries”
[On]:
Calculates a route which does not avoid fer-
ries.
[Off]:
Calculates a route which avoids ferries as
far as possible.
!“U-turns”
[On]:
Calculates a route which does not avoid U-
turns.
[Off]:
Calculates a route which avoids U-turns as
far as possible.
pTurning back on a divided highway is
not considered a U-turn.
!“Permit Needed”
[On]:
Calculates the route without taking into ac-
count roads and areas where permission is
needed for entry.
[Off]:
Calculates the route taking into account the
roads and areas where permission is
needed for entry.
!“Toll Roads”
[On]:
Calculates a route which does not avoid toll
roads and areas.
[Off]:
Calculates a route which avoids toll roads
and areas as far as possible.
Warnings
The settings related to warnings can be custo-
mized.
%Touch [Warnings] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Warning settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Warn When Speeding”
Sets whether or not to enable the excessive
speed warnings for when you exceed the
speed limit.
CAUTION
Customizing preferences
En
148
Chapter
25
The speed limit is based on the map data-
base. The speed limit in the database may
not match the actual speed limit of the cur-
rent road. This is not a definite value. Be
sure to drive according to the actual speed
limit.
!“Speeding Tolerance”
Sets the tolerance for the speed limit
with a percentage.
Regional Settings
The display format for the distance unit, lati-
tude and longitude, and other settings related
to time and date can be customized.
%Touch [Regional Settings] on the “Navi
Settings”menu.
The “Regional Settings”screen appears.
Available options;
!“Distance Units”
Controls the unit of distance and speed
shown.
!“Coordinate display format”
Controls the format of latitude and longi-
tude shown.
!“Date format”
Controls the date display format.
!“Date delimiter”
Controls the delimiter format used for date
display.
!“Time format”
Controls the time display format.
Set Home
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Setting your home position on page 154.
Demo Mode
This is a demonstration function for retail
stores. After a route is set, touching this key
starts the simulation of route guidance.
1 Touch [Demo Mode] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
2 The demonstration guidance will
begin.
pIf you want to run the simulation at faster
speed, touch [Fly over] on the “Route In-
formation”screen.
=For more details of the operation, refer to
Playing simulated travel at high speed on
page 60.
Sound settings
All settings here are effective only for the navi-
gation guidance and beep.
%Touch [Sound settings] on the “Navi
Settings”menu.
The “Sound settings”menu appears.
Available options;
!“Master”
Controls the master volume of both the na-
vigation guidance and beep.
!“Voice”
Controls the volume of the navigation gui-
dance.
Customizing preferences
En 149
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
!“Keys”
[On]:
Sounds a beep.
[Off]:
Does not sound a beep.
!“Dynamic Volume”
Increases and decreases the master vo-
lume of the navigation guidance and beep
automatically according to the current
speed. This function is very helpful when
you are driving at high speed and there is
too much noise to hear the guidance in-
structions and beep.
Touching allows you to enter the de-
tailed setting screen only when [On] has
been selected.
“Minimum speed:”
Enables the navigation system to automati-
cally start turning the volume up as the cur-
rent speed reaches the value set here.
“Maximum speed:”
Enables the navigation system to automati-
cally maximize the volume when the current
speed reaches the value set here.
Important Notice regarding Volume of
Navigation Voice Guidance when Playing
Audio Files from USB or SD
If music files stored on an external storage device
(USB, SD) are played when the system guides the
route (i.e., a destination has been selected and
the system is routing you to a destination), the vo-
lume of the navigation guidance voice will be the
same as the volume of the music files being
played, even if a different volume level has been
selected on “Master”or “Voice”or “Dynamic Vo-
lume”in the “Sound settings”menu.
About
Enables you to check the copyright and other
information about the map database.
1 Touch [About].
Copyright information of the database is dis-
played.
2 Touch [Maps].
Touching [Maps] allows you to view the infor-
mation regarding the map database in detail.
After that, touching the desired item on the
list allows you to view more detailed informa-
tion about the selected map database.
POI display settings
You can display or hide the POI (points of inter-
est) icons on the map. To avoid the screen be-
coming crowded with POI icons, all the icons
have been made invisible as a default setting.
You can set the conditions for each category
here and also create new categories.
pIf the custom POI is found on an external
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation
system will show a POI list which includes
them.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [POI Settings].
3 Touch the desired category that you
want to display.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, repeat this step as many
times as necessary.
If there aren’t anymore detailed categories, a
blank list appears. In this case, you can only
create the new category by touching [New
Group].
4 Touch [Edit] on the right of the desired
sub-category to set the appearance.
Customizing preferences
En
150
Chapter
25
5 Touch the desired key to customize it.
Available options;
!“POI Icon Visibility Distance”
Touch this key to show options. Touch one
of them to set the desired visibility.
When “Satellite”is selected, the POI icons
will appear even though they are far away
from your current position. When “Close”is
selected, only the nearest POI icons will ap-
pear. Selecting “Off”hides the POI icons of
this category.
!“Same Visibility in Subgroups”
[On]:
Also applies this visibility to all sub-cate-
gories belonging to this category.
[Off]:
Does not apply this visibility to all sub-cate-
gories belonging to this category.
!“Icon:”
Touch this key to show options. Touch one
of them to set the desired icon.
![Remove]:
Touch this key to delete the selected cate-
gory.
p[Remove] is available only for POI cate-
gories that are created on this naviga-
tion system.
Creating new categories
If your customized POI does not match any of
the pre-installed categories, create a new cate-
gory and edit your customized POI so that it
can belong to this newly-created category.
pIf the custom POI is found on an external
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation
system will show a POI list which includes
them.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [POI Settings].
3 Touch the desired category.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, repeat this step as many
times as necessary.
If there aren’t any more detailed categories, a
blank list appears. In this case, touching
[New Group] allows you to create a new cate-
gory.
4 Touch [New Group] at the screen where
you want to create a new category.
5 Enter the category name and touch
[Done] to complete the entry.
Customizing preferences
En 151
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
Editing your customized POI
If you have already stored the customized POI,
you can edit its POI properties.
pIf the custom POI is found on an external
storage device (USB, SD), the navigation
system will show a POI list which includes
them.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [POI Settings].
3 Touch the category you want to edit.
If there are more detailed categories within the
selected category, repeat this step until the de-
sired POI appears.
4 Touch the POI you want.
The “Edit POI”screen appears.
5 Touch the desired key to customize it.
Available options;
!“Group:”
The category that the item currently se-
lected belongs to can be changed. Touch-
ing the key shows the options available.
Touch one of them to set the desired cate-
gory.
!“POI Name:”
Touching the key displays the screen for en-
tering a new POI name. Enter the name
and then touch [Done] to complete the
entry.
!“Icon:”
Touch this key to show options. Touch one
of them to set the desired icon.
![Remove]:
Touching the key allows you to delete the
selected POI.
p[Remove] is available only for POIs that are
created on this navigation system.
pThe POI address is not editable.
Recording your travel history
Activating the track logger enables you to re-
cord your driving history (called “track log”
below). You can review the travel history later
and replay the travel for your reference.
Activating track logger temporarily
One-time activation is useful if you want to
create a log only for that trip.
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [Manage Track Logs].
A list of track logs already recorded appears. A
blank list appears if you have not recorded it
yet.
Customizing preferences
En
152
Chapter
25
3 Touch [Record] to activate the track log-
ger.
The key then changes to [Stop Recording].
Touching [Stop Recording] allows you to de-
activate the track logger.
Touching [Export all track logs] exports all
track logs currently stored to the external sto-
rage device (USB or SD) at once.
In addition, if you export track logs to the exter-
nal storage devices, you can check the track
logs using [AVIC FEEDS].
pIf there is not enough space in the built-in
memory, the oldest track log will be over-
written by the new one.
pIf you want to permanently activate the
track logger whenever the GPS signal is
available, switch “Enable Auto-saving”to
“On”.
=For details, refer to Setting track logger
options on this page.
Browsing and replaying the track log
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [Manage Track Logs].
A list of track logs already recorded appears.
Touching enables you to replay the track
log with “Fly over”.
3 Touch the desired track log on the list.
More details about the track log appears.
4 Touch the desired key to operate it.
Available options;
![Rename]:
Touch this key to display the screen for en-
tering a new name for the track log. Enter
the name and then touch [Done] to com-
plete the entry.
![Export]:
Touch this key to export the currently se-
lected track log to the external storage de-
vice (USB or SD).
![Delete]:
Touch this key to delete the track log.
![Delete all]:
Touching this key deletes all track logs.
!The key next to “Color on the map:”:
Touching this key displays the screen for
changing the color used for the route high-
lighting of the track log. Touch the desired
color on the color list. The color of track
logs is assigned automatically within prede-
fined colors when this setting is estab-
lished.
Setting track logger options
1 Touch [Map Visual] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
The “Map Visual Settings”screen appears.
2 Touch [Manage Track Logs].
3 Touch [Track Log Options].
Customizing preferences
En 153
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
4 Touch the desired key to operate it.
Available options;
!“Update interval:”
Sets how often the system updates the log.
!“Current autosave track size:”
Sets a size limit on automatic logging. This
setting will be effective only when “Enable
Auto-saving”is “On”.
!“Enable Auto-saving”
Sets whether or not automatic logging is
activated.
!“Limit Track DB Size”
Limits the total data size for logging.
!“Maximum track database size:”
Sets a size limit on logging. This parameter
is only adjustable when “Limit Track DB
Size”is “On”.
!“Create NMEA Log”
Creates the log files in the SD memory
card. When this setting is “On”, the system
outputs the log files with NMEA-0183 for-
mat onto the SD memory card.
Setting your home position
Registering your home position saves time
and effort. Also, routes to home positions can
be calculated easily with a single touch of the
key from the “Destination Menu”. The regis-
tered home position can also be modified
later.
1 Touch [Set Home] on the “Navi Set-
tings”menu.
2 Touch the key next to “Address:”.
3 Perform one of the search methods and
locate the cursor on your desired position.
4 Touch [OK].
5 Touch the key next to “Phone #”.
6 Enter your home phone number, then
touch [Done].
Options on the “System
Settings”menu
Displaying the “System
Settings”menu
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”, and then touch [Settings].
2 Touch [System Settings].
The “System Settings”menu appears.
Customizing preferences
En
154
Chapter
25
Selecting the language
You can set the languages used on the pro-
gram and voice guidance. Each language can
be set separately.
pIf you use voice operation, select [English]
in [Program language:]of“Language”.If
you select other languages, voice operation
will not be available.
=For details, refer to Basics of Voice Oper-
ation on page 167.
1 Touch [Language] on the “System Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on the previous page.
2 Touch the key next to “Voice lan-
guage:”.
The language list is displayed.
3 Touch the desired language.
After the language is selected, the screen re-
turns to the previous screen.
p[TTS Setup] is not used normally. This key
will be used in the future when the system
needs a replacement of current TTS files.
4 Touch the key next to “Program lan-
guage:”.
5 Touch the desired language.
If you change [Program language:], a mes-
sage prompting you to reboot appears. Touch
[OK] to reboot the system.
Changing the splash screen
You can change the splash screen that ap-
pears when the navigation system starts. Copy
your chosen image to the external storage de-
vice (USB, SD), and select the image to im-
port.
pSplash screen images should be used with-
in the following formats;
—BMP or JPEG files
—Allowable horizontal and vertical size
are 2592 pixels x 1944 pixels or smaller
—Allowable data size is 15 MB or smaller
pProper compatibility with allowable files is
not guaranteed.
Customizing preferences
En 155
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
pImported original images will be stored in
the built-in memory, but the ability to save
these images cannot be guaranteed com-
pletely. If your original image data is de-
leted, insert the external storage device
(USB, SD) again and re-import the original
image.
1 Create a folder named “Pictures”on the
top-most directory of the external storage
device (USB, SD) and store the picture files
in this folder.
2 Insert the SD memory card into the SD
card slot or plug the USB storage device
into the USB connector.
3 Touch [Splash Screen] on the “System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
The navigation system checks the external sto-
rage device (USB, SD). If an appropriate file is
found, the file list will be displayed.
pIf there is no “Pictures”folder or loadable
file, a message appears.
pYou can switch the list by touching [Import
from SD] and [Import from USB].
4 Touch the image to use as the splash
screen from the list.
The image is displayed on the screen.
5 Touch [OK].
The image is set as the splash screen, and the
system returns to the “System Settings”
menu.
Setting the rear view camera
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For de-
tails, consult your dealer.)
Rear view camera
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
view camera image installed on your vehicle.
When the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) po-
sition, the screen automatically switches to
full-screen rear view camera.
Camera for “RearView”
[RearView] can display the full-screen rear
view camera image any time without relation
to the shift lever position after touching [Rear-
View] on the “AV Source”menu. [RearView]
is useful if you want to monitor an attached
trailer, etc.
CAUTION
Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which
outputs mirror reversed images, otherwise the
screen image may appear reversed.
pImmediately verify whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when
the shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R)
from another position.
pWhen the whole screen changes to a rear
view camera image during normal driving,
switch to another setting.
pInitially, this function is set to “On”.
1 Touch [Back Camera] on the “System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
The “Camera Input”screen appears.
2 Touch [On] next to “Camera”to acti-
vate the camera setting.
pYou can only switch to “RearView”if this
setting is [On].
3 Touch [Battery] or [GND] next to
“Polarity”to select the appropriate polarity
setting.
!Battery —When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
!GND —When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in
the REVERSE (R) position
Customizing preferences
En
156
Chapter
25
Adjusting the response
positions of the touch panel
(touch panel calibration)
If you feel that the touch panel keys on the
screen deviate from the actual positions that
respond to your touch, adjust the response po-
sitions of the touch panel screen.
pDo not use a sharp pointed tool such as a
ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen, which
could damage the screen.
1 Touch [Screen Calibration] on the “Sys-
tem Settings”menu.
A message confirming whether to start the ca-
libration appears.
pYou can also start calibration by pressing
and holding the MENU button on the “Top
Menu”.
2 Touch [OK].
3 Touch and hold the target that point to
the center and corners of the LCD screen.
The target indicates the order.
4 Touch anywhere on the screen.
The adjusted position data will be saved.
pDo not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
5 Touch [OK].
Adjusting the screen brightness
1 Touch [Picture Adjustment] on the “Sys-
tem Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
2 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the brightness.
Each time you touch [+]or[–] increases or de-
creases the level. 10 to 00 is displayed as the
level is increased or decreased.
3 Touch to return to the previous
screen.
pYou can also start adjustment by pressing
and holding the MAP button.
Setting the illumination color
The illumination color can be selected from 11
different colors. Furthermore, the illumination
color can switched between these 11 colors in
order.
Selecting the color from the preset
colors
1 Touch [Illumi Color] on the “System Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
Customizing preferences
En 157
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
2 Touch the color you want.
Current color balance
Available options;
!Colored keys —Selects the desired preset
color
!Memory 1/Memory 2/Memory 3 —Col-
ors registered in the memory
=For details, refer to Creating a user-de-
fined color and storing it to memory on
this page.
!Scan —Shifts between the eight default
colors in sequence gradually.
Creating a user-defined color and
storing it to memory
You can create a user-defined color and set it
as the illumination color.
1 Touch [Illumi Color] on the “System Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
2 Touch [Custom].
pIf [Scan] is set, [Custom] cannot be se-
lected.
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the values for
Red, Green and Blue to create a favorite
color.
Watch the illumination of hardware keys while
adjusting the color.
Each time you touch [+]or[–] increases or de-
creases the value of the selected item. +31 to
+00 is displayed as the value is increased or
decreased.
pAn entry cannot be stored with all of the va-
lues set to “+00”.
4 Touch [Memory 1], [Memory 2] or
[Memory 3] to store the illumination color.
5 Touch to return to the previous
screen.
Checking the version information
1 Touch [Service Information] on the
“System Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
2 Check the version information.
Restore Factory Settings
Resets various settings registered to the navi-
gation system and restores them to the default
or factory settings.
pSome data remains. Read Returning the na-
vigation system to the default or factory set-
tings before you operate this function.
=For more detailed information about the
items which would be erased, refer to
Returning the navigation system to the
default or factory settings on page 174.
Customizing preferences
En
158
Chapter
25
1 Touch [Restore/Delete] on the “System
Settings”menu.
2 Touch [Restore Factory Settings] or [De-
lete user information].
pBecause deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to mistakenly delete
items.
3 Touch [OK].
The navigation system will now restart.
Turning off the screen
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without
turning off the voice guidance.
%Touch [Screen Off] on the “System Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “System
Settings”menu on page 154.
The screen is turned off.
pTouch anywhere on the screen to turn it
back on.
The “AV Sound Settings”
menu options
Displaying the “AV Sound
Settings”menu
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”, and then touch [Settings].
2 Touch [AV Sound].
The “AV Sound Settings”menu appears.
pYou cannot make adjustments when the AV
source is “OFF”.
pYou cannot select [SLA] when the FM tuner
is selected as the AV source.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that
provides an ideal listening environment in all
occupied seats.
1 Touch [FAD/BAL] on the “AV Sound Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on this page.
When [Sub W] is selected in [Rear SP],
[Balance] will be displayed instead of
[FAD/BAL] and front/rear speaker balance
cannot be adjusted.
=Refer to Setting the rear output on page 165.
2 Touch [a]or[b] to adjust front/rear
speaker balance.
Each time you touch [a]or[b], the front/rear
speaker balance moves towards the front or
the rear.
Customizing preferences
En 159
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
“Front:15”to “Rear:15”is displayed as the
front/rear speaker balance moves from front to
rear.
Setting “Front:”and “Rear:”to “0”is correct
when using a two speaker system.
3 Touch [c]or[d] to adjust left/right
speaker balance.
Each time you touch [c]or[d], the left/right
speaker balance moves towards the left or the
right.
Left:15 to Right:15 is displayed as the left/
right speaker balance moves from left to right.
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust equalization to
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics
as desired.
Recalling equalizer curves
There are seven stored equalizer curves that
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list
of the equalizer curves:
Equalizer curve
S.Bass
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is
boosted.
Powerful
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted.
Natural
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.
Vocal
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the
human vocal range, is boosted.
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
Custom1
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. A separate custom curve can be created for each
source.
Custom2
Custom2 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate. If you select this curve, the effect is reflected all
AV source.
1 Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on the previous
page.
2 Touch the equalizer you want.
pYou can also sequentially select the desired
equalizer curve by touching [EQ] on the AV
operation screen of each source.
Adjusting the equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired. Adjustments can be
made with a 3-band parametric equalizer.
The difference between “Custom1”and
“Custom2”
!A separate Custom1 curve can be created
for each source. If you make adjustments
when a curve S.Bass,Powerful,Natural,
Vocal,Flat,orCustom1 is selected, the
equalizer curve settings will be memorized
in Custom1.
!ACustom2 curve can be created common
to all sources. If you make adjustments
when Custom2 curve is selected, the Cus-
tom2 curve will be updated.
!The adjusted Custom1 curve is memorized
for each of the source selected, but one
curve is shared for the following sources.
—CD,ROM,DVD-V,DVD-VR,DivX (for
AVIC-X910BT)
Customizing preferences
En
160
Chapter
25
—CD,ROM (for AVIC-X710BT)
—XM and SIRIUS
—AV1 and AV2
—EXT1 and EXT2
!The different source volume level can be
set between iPod and USB.
!When [Flat] is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
[Flat] and a set equalizer curve.
Adjustable parameters
You can adjust the center frequency, level and
Q factor (curve characteristics) of each cur-
rently selected curve band (Low/Mid/High).
!Band:
You can select the equalizer band.
!Frequency:
You can select which frequency to set as
the center frequency.
!Level:
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the
selected EQ.
!Q:
You can select the details of the curve char-
acteristics. (The following figure shows the
characteristic image.)
1 Touch [EQ] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
2 Touch the one of keys to select a curve
that you want to use as the basis of custo-
mizing.
3 Touch [Customize].
4 Touch [c]or[d] to select the equalizer
band to adjust.
Each time you touch [c]or[d] selects equali-
zer bands in the following order:
Low —Mid —High
5 Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired
frequency.
Touch [c]or[d] until the desired frequency
appears in the display.
Low:40 Hz —80 Hz —100 Hz —160 Hz
Mid:200 Hz —500 Hz —1 kHz —2 kHz
High:3.15 kHz —8 kHz —10 kHz —
12.5 kHz
6 Touch [c]or[d] to adjust the level of
the equalizer band.
Each time you touch [c]or[d], the level of
the equalization band increases or decreases.
+6 to –6is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
7 Touch [c]or[d] to select the desired Q
factor.
Touch [c]or[d] until the desired Q factor ap-
pears in the display.
Wide2 —Wide1 —Narrow1 —Narrow2
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch [Loudness] on the “AV Sound
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
Customizing preferences
En 161
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
2 Touch [Loudness] to select the level you
want.
Each time you touch [Loudness], the level is
selected in the following order:
Off —Low —Mid —High
Using subwoofer output
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output mechanism, which can be
turned on or off.
pOnly when “Sub Woofer”is [On], you can
adjust “Phase”,“Level”and “Frequency”.
1 Touch [Sub Woofer] on the “AV Sound
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
2 Touch [On] to turn subwoofer output
on.
To turn subwoofer output off, touch [Off].
3 Touch [Reverse] or [Normal] to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
4 Touch [+] or [–] next to “Level”to adjust
the output level.
+6 to –24 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
5 Touch [+] or [–] next to “Frequency”to
select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch [+]or[–], cut-off frequen-
cies are selected in the following order:
50 Hz —63 Hz —80 Hz —100 Hz —125 Hz
Only frequencies lower than those in the se-
lected range are output from the subwoofer.
Using the high pass filter
When you do not want low sounds from the
subwoofer output frequency range to play
from the front or rear speakers, activate HPF
(high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than
those in the selected range are output from
the front or rear speakers.
1 Touch [HPF] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
2 Touch [HPF] to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch [HPF] selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Off —50 Hz —63 Hz —80 Hz —100 Hz —
125 Hz
Adjusting source levels
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust
the volume level of each source to prevent ra-
dical changes in volume when switching be-
tween sources.
pSettings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level
with the level of the source you wish to ad-
just.
2 Touch [SLA] on the “AV Sound Settings”
menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
3 Touch [+] or [–] to adjust the source vo-
lume.
+4 to –4is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
The following AV sources are set to the same
source level adjustment volume automatically.
!CD,ROM,DivX (for AVIC-X910BT)
!CD,ROM (for AVIC-X710BT)
!XM and SIRIUS
!AV1 and AV2
!EXT1 and EXT2
Customizing preferences
En
162
Chapter
25
pThe different source volume level can be set
between iPod and USB.
pFor AVIC-X910BT, the source volume level
can be set to DVD-V and DVD-VR respec-
tively as well as differently from the other
sources of the built-in DVD drive previously
mentioned.
Enhancing bass (Bass Booster)
The “Bass Booster”enhances bass sounds,
which can be muted by driving noise.
1 Touch [Bass Booster] on the “AV Sound
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV
Sound Settings”menu on page 159.
2 Touch [+] or [-] to adjust the range from
0to6.
Options on the “AV System
Settings”menu
Displaying the “AV System
Settings”menu
1 Press the MENU button to display the
“Top Menu”, and then touch [Settings].
2 Touch [AV Settings].
The “AV System Settings”menu appears.
pYou can only adjust [Wide Mode] when se-
lecting an AV source with video.
pOnly when the AV source is “OFF”, the fol-
lowing items can be adjusted;
[MUTE Input/GUIDE] and [Rear SP]
Setting video input 1 (AV1)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
pThis setting applies to RCA inputs
(AUDIO INPUT and VIDEO INPUT) on the
back of the system.
%Touch [AV1 Input] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on this page.
Each touch of [AV1 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
!iPod —iPod connected with the USB Inter-
face cable for iPod (CD-IU230V)
!Video —External video component
!EXT —Pioneer external unit connected
with the RCA video cable
!Off —No video component is connected
Setting video input 2 (AV2)
You can switch this setting according to the
connected component.
pThis setting applies to mini-jack input on
the front panel.
%Touch [AV2 Input] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on this page.
Customizing preferences
En 163
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
Each touch of [AV2 Input] changes the set-
ting as follows:
!Off —No video component is connected
!Video —External video component
pUse AV2 Input when connecting CD-RM10
(sold separately) through the external video
component.
Switching the auto antenna
setting
If the blue lead of the navigation system is
connected to the antenna control terminal of
the vehicle, select either of the following set-
tings.
!Radio —The antenna extends or turns on
only when the audio source is FM or AM.
The antenna is stored or turned off when
the AV source is switched to another
source.
!Power —The antenna extends or turns on
when the ignition switch is turned on. The
antenna is stored or turned off when the
ignition switch is turned off.
%Touch [Ant CTRL] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on the previous page.
Touching [Ant CTRL] switches between
[Radio] and [Power].
pRegardless of whether [Radio]or[Power]
is selected, turning off the ignition switch
will cause the antenna to automatically re-
tract or turn off.
Changing the wide screen mode
%Touch [Wide Mode] on the “AV System
Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on the previous page.
Each touch of [Wide Mode] changes the set-
ting as follows:
Full —Normal
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal di-
rection only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV pic-
ture (normal picture) without any omissions.
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed normally, giving you
no sense of disparity since its proportions are
the same as that of the normal picture.
pDifferent settings can be stored for each
video source.
pThe same setting is automatically applied
for the following grouping.
!SD,USB,iPod
!AV1 and AV2
!EXT1 and EXT2
pWhen video is viewed in a wide screen
mode that does not match its original as-
pect ratio, it may look strange.
pRemember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may
constitute an infringement on the author’s
rights protected by the Copyright Law.
pThe navigation map and the rear view cam-
era picture is always viewed at Full.
Switching the sound muting/
attenuation
You can select the muting method when the
navigation guidance is output. This setting is
also effective for a mute signal that has been
received from the MUTE lead connected to the
navigation system.
pWhen you use a cellular phone connected
with Bluetooth technology (dialing, talking,
incoming call), the AV source volume is al-
ways muted independently of this setting.
pWhen the voice recognition mode is acti-
vated, the AV source volume is always
muted independently of this setting.
%Touch [MUTE Input/GUIDE] on the “AV
System Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on the previous page.
Each touch of [MUTE Input/GUIDE] changes
the setting as follows:
!MUTE —Muting
Customizing preferences
En
164
Chapter
25
!ATT —Attenuation
!Normal —Volume does not change
pOperation returns to normal when the cor-
respond action is ended.
pWhen “SD”or “USB”selected as the AV
source, the sounds are not muted or attenu-
ated even when the navigation guidance
and beep outputs.
pWhen “SD”or “USB”is selected as the AV
source, the AV sounds, the navigation gui-
dance and beep sounds are mixed and the
volume can be adjusted simultaneously.
Important Notice regarding Volume of
Navigation Voice Guidance when Playing
Audio Files from USB or SD
If music files stored on an external storage device
(USB, SD) are played when the system guides the
route (i.e., a destination has been selected and
the system is routing you to a destination), the vo-
lume of the navigation guidance voice will be the
same as the volume of the music files being
played, even if a different volume level has been
selected on “Master”or “Voice”or “Dynamic Vo-
lume”in the “Sound settings”menu.
Setting the rear output
The navigation system’s rear output can be
used for a full-range speaker or subwoofer
connection. If you switch Rear SP to Sub W,
you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to
a subwoofer without using an auxiliary amp.
Initially, the navigation system is set for a rear
full-range speaker connection (Full).
1 Touch [Rear SP] on the “AV System Set-
tings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on page 163.
2 Touch [Rear SP] to switch the rear out-
put setting.
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full.
When a subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Sub W.
pBoth rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting. (When you use the product
without RCA rear output, this setting only
applies to the rear speaker leads.)
Acquiring/Cataloging iPod
music information
If you always set the language other than “Eng-
lish”on “Program language:”, this setting is
unnecessary.
Unless [VR Catalog Mode] is turned off, this
navigation system tries to acquire the informa-
tion needed to operate iPod with voice com-
mands. It may take a short period of time to
transfer the information. Change the setting
according to your usage.
The navigation system starts acquiring/catalo-
ging music information (1) when the iPod is
connected or when the system boots up while
the iPod is connected and (2) when iPod is the
selected and displayed AV Source, unless [VR
Catalog Mode] is turned off.
pIf you do not use iPod, this setting is un-
necessary.
pDuring transfer, iPod operations (such as
[Shuffle], [Menu], or [Video]) are not
available.
pOnce the cataloging is completed, you can
deactivate [VR Catalog Mode] until you
update the content/data on iPod. If you up-
date the iPod data, activate [VR Catalog
Mode] again to transfer the music informa-
tion and synchronize the music information
for voice commands with the data on iPod.
pAfter you select “Off”in [VR Catalog
Mode], the system doesn’t catalog the
data on the iPod. In such case, the pre-
viously cataloged data are available as
voice commands.
Customizing preferences
En 165
Chapter
25
Customizing preferences
pOnce you start the cataloging process, only
a few basic voice commands can be used
for iPod until the process has completely
finished.
pIf unreadable characters are included in
the data on your iPod, names or types may
not be available as voice commands.
Important Notice regarding Voice
Control for iPods
Voice Control for iPods may be limited if cata-
loging of iPod content is not completed. Cata-
loging of iPod content only occurs when the
system is in “AV Source”mode and the “iPod”
is the selected and displayed “AV Source”
screen. Cataloging of iPod content will not
occur if the system is off, if any other “AV
Source”is selected (aside from iPod), or if the
system is in any other mode (aside from “AV
Source”mode) such as “Destination Menu”,
“Contacts”,“Settings Menu”,“Phone Menu”
or the map screen. If you wish to use Voice
Control for all iPod content, it is recommended
that you first connect your iPod, select “iPod”
as the AV source, and keep the iPod screen
displayed until cataloging is completed —cat-
aloging of iPod content should only take a few
minutes, and will depend on the size of the
conent stored on your iPod. A message will be
displayed when cataloging is completed.
1 Touch [VR Catalog Mode] on the “AV
System Settings”menu.
=For details, refer to Displaying the “AV Sys-
tem Settings”menu on page 163.
2 Touch [On] or [Off] to activate or deacti-
vate “VR Catalog Mode”.
Customizing preferences
En
166
Chapter
25
To Ensure Safe Driving
Some functions of the navigation system sup-
ports voice operation.
pThe navigation function is not available
using voice operation.
CAUTION
For your safety, avoid viewing the screen in the
voice operation as much as possible while
driving.
If you use voice operation, select [English]in
[Program language:]of“Language”. If you
select other languages, voice operation will not
be available.
Basics of Voice Operation
Your Pioneer navigation system uses the latest
in voice recognition technology. You can use
voice commands to operate many of its func-
tions. This chapter describes where you can
use voice commands, and also what com-
mands the system accepts.
Flow of voice operation
You can start voice operation any time even
when the map screen is displayed or audio is
operating. (Some operations are not available.)
The basic steps of voice operations are as
follows.
1 Switch the screen to map screen or AV
operation screen.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Screen switching overview on page 34.
2 Press MULTI-CONTROL to activate voice
operations.
3 Speak a command into the microphone
after the beep.
4 When the command is recognized, the
navigation system displays next options on
the screen, and pronounces it in some case-
s.
5 Repeat previous step as necessary.
6 The requested operation will be carried
out.
pThe voice operation may not be operable for a
minute after the navigation system has booted
up.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En 167
Chapter
26
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Starting voice operation
%Press MULTI-CONTROL on map screen
or the AV operation screen.
The voice operation screen appears.
If you lose your way...
You can listen to the brief operating instruc-
tion by touching .
To cancel voice operation
You can cancel the voice operation feature at
any time by saying “Cancel”. After you cancel
voice operations, the display returns to the
screen displayed before the voice operation
screen appeared.
pYou can also cancel voice operation if you
touch on the voice operation screen, or
press MENU button or MAP button.
Operating iPod by voice
You can play music using voice operation from
the iPod connected to the navigation system.
pPlayback of iPod movies is not available
using voice commands.
pTo use the content/data on the iPod for
voice operation, transfer the data to this
system first.
=For details, refer to Acquiring/Cataloging
iPod music information on page 165.
Examples of voice operation of the iPod are
shown below. (A method for playing the album
title named “Pioneer”is described here, along
with an operational example.)
1 Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-
eration.
2 Say “Change Source”to display the AV
source selection screen.
3 Say “iPod”on the selection screen to
switch the AV source to iPod.
pTouching the item on the screen also en-
ables you to select the desired AV source.
4 Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-
eration.
5 Say “Play the album Pioneer”to play-
back the album name “Pioneer”.
If the command is recognized properly, play-
back starts from the first song of “Pioneer”.
Calling the entry on “Contacts”
A method for dialing the entry named “Nancy”
is described here along with an operational ex-
ample.
1 Press MULTI-CONTROL to start voice op-
eration.
2 Say “Call Nancy”to make a call.
Dialing starts.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En
168
Chapter
26
Available Basic Voice Commands
The navigation system can also recognize the
words in the following list.
Basic commands
Voice commands and operations
Back dReturns the previous screen.
Cancel dCancels the voice operation.
Help dOutputs the brief operating instruction by voice.
Voice operation for the iPod
For <Artist name>, <Album name>, <Play-
list name>, <Genre name> shown on the fol-
lowing chart, say the name their name in the
iPod.
pPlayback of iPod movies is not available
using voice commands.
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play dPlays all songs randomly.
Pause the music,Stop the music dPauses the song currently playing .
Resume the music dResumes the song currently playing .
Next song dPlays the next song.
Previous song dPlays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.
Play songs dStart playback from the top of “Songs”.
Play artists dStart playback from the top of “Artists”.
Play the artist <Artist name> dStart playback from the top of the selected artist.
Play albums dStart playback from the top of “Albums”.
Play the album <Album name> dStart playback from the top of the selected album.
Play playlists dStart playback from the top of “Playlists”.
Play the playlist <Playlist name> dStart playback from the top of the selected playlist.
Play genres dStart playback from the top of “Genres”.
Play the genre <Genre name> dStart playback from the top of the selected genre.
Show artists dDisplays the artist list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. dTouch the desired
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show the artist <Artist name> dDisplays the album list of the selected artist together with sub-screen to continue
the voice operation. dTouch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show albums dDisplays the album list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. dTouch the de-
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show the album <Album name> dDisplays the song list of the selected album together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. dTouch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En 169
Chapter
26
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Show playlists dDisplays the playlist together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. dTouch the de-
sired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show the playlist <Playlist name> dDisplays the song list of the selected playlist together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. dTouch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show genre dDisplays the genre list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. dTouch the desired
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show the genre <Genre name> dDisplays the song list of the selected genre list together with sub-screen to con-
tinue the voice operation. dTouch the desired item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Show songs dDisplays the song list together with sub-screen to continue the voice operation. dTouch the desired
item on the list or say the desired voice commands.
Page down,Page up dDisplays the previous or next page of the selection list. (Note 1)
(Note 1) The voice commands is available only when the selection list is displayed.
Voice operation for AV source (other than iPod)
AV source selection
Voice commands and operations
Change Source to DISC dSwitch the AV source to DISC.
Change Source to FM dSwitch the AV source to FM.
Change Source to AM dSwitch the AV source to AM.
Change Source to XM Satellite Radio dSwitch the AV source to XM.
Change Source to SIRIUS Satellite Radio dSwitch the AV source to SIRIUS.
Change Source to HD Radio dSwitch the AV source to Digital Radio.
Change Source to SD Media dSwitch the AV source to SD.
Change Source to USB dSwitch the AV source to USB.
Change Source to iPod dSwitch the AV source to iPod.
Change Source dSwitch to the AV source selection screen. dTouch the desired AV source or say the desired AV
source name.
External storage device (USB, SD)
Voice commands and operations
Shuffle play dPlays all songs randomly.
Pause the music,Stop the music dPauses the song currently playing .
Resume the music dResumes the song currently playing .
Next song dPlays the next song.
Previous song dPlays the previous song or return to the beginning of the song currently playing.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En
170
Chapter
26
Voice commands related to hands-free phoning
pYou can make a phone call by voice dialing
if the cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
wireless technology is being paired with
the navigation system.
pFor <entry’s name> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the name of the entry stored
in “Contacts”.
pFor <phone number> shown on the follow-
ing chart, say the desired phone number.
Voice commands and operations
Call <entry’sname>dMake a call to the entry (Note 2).
Call <entry’sname>mobile dDial the cellular phone number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’sname>home dDial the home phone number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <entry’sname>office dDial the office phone number of the entry (Note 3).
Call <phone number> dDial the phone number.
Make a call dSay the phone number you want to call dThe system starts dialing to the number.
Make a call dSay the name of entry stored on “Contacts”you want to call dThe system starts dialing to the num-
ber (Note2).
List outgoing calls dDisplay the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Numbers”) to select the number and call.
List recent calls dIncoming calls (Note 4) dDisplay the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select
the number and call.
List recent calls dOutgoing calls (Note 4) dDisplay the list of recent outgoing calls (“Dialed Numbers”) to select
the number and call.
List recent incoming calls dDisplay the list of recently received calls (“Received Calls”) to select the number and
call.
(Note 2) If the entry has multiple phone number data, selection list may appear. In such case, say the type of phone
number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.
(Note 3) If there is no corresponding type on the entry, the system may suggest you other phone numbers of the entry.
In such case, say the type of phone number or touch the one of listed item that you want to dial.
(Note 4) Touching the item on the screen also enables you to select the desired list.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En 171
Chapter
26
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
Tips for Voice Operation
For your voice commands to be correctly re-
cognized and interpreted, ensure that condi-
tions are suitable for recognition.
Close the vehicle windows
Please note that wind through the vehicle win-
dow or miscellaneous noise from outside the
vehicle can interfere with voice operation.
Position the microphone carefully
For optimum pick-up, the microphone should
be fixed at a suitable distance directly in front
of the driver.
Pause before giving a command
Speaking too soon may cause the recognition
to fail.
Pronounce your commands carefully
Speak slowly, deliberately, and clearly.
Operating Your Navigation System with Voice
En
172
Chapter
26
Setting the anti-theft function
You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or the RESET
button is pressed after the password is set, the
navigation system prompts for the password
at the time of next boot up.
Setting the password
1 With the map displayed, press the
MENU button.
2 Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.
3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
Area1 Area2 Area3
4 Touch [Set Password].
The password setting screen appears.
5 Enter the password you want to set.
p5 to 16 characters can be entered for a
password.
6 Touch [Done].
7 Reenter the password to confirm the
setting.
8 Touch [Done].
Password protection is applied.
pIf you want to change the password cur-
rently set, enter the current password and
then enter the new one.
Entering the password
On the password input screen, you must enter
the current password. If you enter an incorrect
password three times, the screen is locked
and operations using touch panel keys are dis-
abled.
1 Enter the password.
2 Touch [Done].
The message “Antitheft is being unlocked.
Do not switch off during the process.”ap-
pears if you entered the correct password and
the navigation system is unlocking.
Deleting the password
The current password can be deleted.
1 With the map displayed, press the
MENU button.
2 Touch [Settings] on the “Top Menu”.
3 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and
then touch and hold Area3.
4 Touch [Clear password].
The password setting screen appears.
5 Enter the current password.
6 Touch [Done].
7 Touch [Yes].
The message for deletion appears and then
the current password is deleted.
Forgotten passwords
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Ser-
vice Station.
Other functions
En 173
Chapter
27
Other functions
Returning the navigation
system to the default or
factory settings
You can return settings or recorded content to
the default or factory settings. There are three
methods to clear user data, and the situations
and the cleared content are different for each
method. For information regarding the content
that is cleared by each method, see the list
presented later.
Method 1: Press the RESET button
Pressing the RESET button clears almost all
settings of the audio function.
This transforms the system into the same state
as when the battery of the vehicle is removed
or the yellow lead of the navigation system is
disconnected.
=For details concerning operations, refer to
Resetting the microprocessor on page 26.
Method 2: Restore Factory Settings
This clears some items in the “Navi Settings”
menu.
=For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-
tings on page 158.
Method 3: Delete user information
Clears almost all settings and user data of the
navigation function, the audio function and
the phone function.
=For details, refer to Restore Factory Set-
tings on page 158.
Other functions
En
174
Chapter
27
Setting items to be deleted
The items to be deleted vary depending on the
reset method. The items listed in the following
table return to the default or factory settings.
pAlmost all items not listed below will be re-
tained. However, some of the items to be re-
turned to their default values are not listed
if the setting value can be easily recovered
by user, such as the last map scale, the last
status of AV operation screen, etc.
—: The setting will be retained.
1: The setting will be cleared and returned to
the default or factory settings.
Navigation functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
Destination Menu
All settings on “MSN Direct”(*) —11
“History”on “Address”——1
[History]——1
[Favorites]——1
“Saved Criteria”on “POI”——1
Navi Settings
[Set Home]——1
[GPS & Time Settings], [Map Visual], [Route],
[Warnings], [Regional Settings]
—11
[Sound settings]
“Voice”,“Keys”,“Dynamic Volume (On/Off)”
—11
[Sound settings]
“Master”,“Dynamic Volume(Maximum speed:,
Minimum speed:)”
——1
System Settings
[Language]—11
Other settings ——1
Others
Pin icon data ——1
Anti-theft password ——1
(*) This function is available for AVIC-X910BT.
Audio functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
AV Settings
[Wide Mode], [VR Catalog Mode]——1
Other settings 1——
AV Sound All settings 1——
CD,ROM,DivX,FM,
AM All settings (*1) 1——
DVD-V,DVD-VR All settings 1——
Other functions
En 175
Chapter
27
Other functions
SD,USB All settings (*1) 1—1
Volume setting for AV sources 1——
(*1) All settings including the setting on the “Function”menu are to be deleted.
Phone functions Method 1 Method 2 Method 3
Phone Menu (*2)
[Phone Volume]——1
[Received Calls]——1
[Dialed Numbers]——1
[Missed Calls]——1
[Phone Settings]——1
Contacts (*2) All entries ——1
(*2) All stored data of 3 users is deleted.
Other functions
En
176
Chapter
27
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common
problems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehen-
sive, it should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be
found here, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems with the navigation screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
The power doesn’t turn on. The
navigation system doesn’t oper-
ate.
Leads and connectors are incor-
rectly connected.
Confirm once more that all connections are
correct.
The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then
replace the fuse. Be very sure to install a cor-
rect fuse with the same rating.
Noise and other factors are causing
the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly.
Press the RESET button. (Page 26)
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map without a significant
positioning error.
The quality of signals from the GPS
satellites is poor, causing reduced
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of
signal quality may occur for the fol-
lowing reasons:
—The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-
ble location.
—Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
—The position of satellites relative
to your vehicle is inadequate.
—Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce accu-
racy. (GPS satellites are operated by
the US Department of Defense, and
the US government reserves the
right to distort positioning data for
military reasons. This may lead to
greater positioning errors.)
—If a vehicle phone or cellular
phone is used near the GPS anten-
na, GPS reception may be lost tem-
porarily.
Check the GPS signal reception and the posi-
tion of the GPS antenna if necessary, or con-
tinue driving until reception improves. Keep
the antenna clear.
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or vehicle wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals.
Signals from the vehicle’s speed
pulse are not being picked up prop-
erly. (This information is intended
for AVIC-X910BT only.)
Check that the cables are properly connected.
If necessary, consult the dealer that installed
the system.
Appendix
En 177
Appendix
Appendix
You cannot position your vehicle
on the map without a significant
positioning error.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.
Check that the navigation system is securely
mounted and, if necessary, consult the dealer
that installed the system.
The navigation system is installed
with an extreme angle exceeding
the installation angle limitations.
Confirm the installation angle. (The naviga-
tion system must be installed within the al-
lowed installation angle. For details, refer to
“Installation Manual”.)
Indication of the position of your ve-
hicle is misaligned after a U-turn or
reversing.
Check whether or not the reverse gear signal
input lead (violet) is connected properly. (The
navigation system works properly without the
lead connected, but positioning accuracy will
be adversely affected.)
The map color does not switch
automatically between daytime
and nighttime.
[Night mode] is set to [Day]. Check [Night mode] setting and make sure
[Automatic] is selected. (Page 145)
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The screen is too bright. An improper value has been set on
“Brightness”.
Check the settings.
The display is very dim. [Night] is selected in “Night
mode”.
Check the setting of [Night mode] and select
[Automatic]or[Day]. (Page 145)
An improper value has been set on
“Brightness”.
Check the settings.
No sounds of AV source are pro-
duced.
The volume level will not rise.
The volume level is low. Adjust the volume level.
The attenuator or mute is on. Turn the attenuator or mute off.
A speaker lead is disconnected. Check the connection.
The volume of navigation gui-
dance and beeps cannot be ad-
justed.
Try to adjust them with MULTI-CON-
TROL.
Turn the volume up or down using [Sound
settings]onthe“Navi Settings”menu.
(Page 149)
The person on the other end of
the phone call cannot hear the
conversation due to an echo.
The voice from the person on the
other end of the phone call is output
from the speakers and then picked
up by the microphone again, creat-
ing an echo.
Use the following methods to reduce the
echo:
—Lower the volume on the receiver
—Have both parties pause slightly before
speaking
There’s no picture. The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied. Connect the parking brake cord, and apply
the parking brake.
The backlight of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Turn on the backlight. (Page 159)
“Rear display”picture disap-
pears. (This information is in-
tended for AVIC-X910BT only.)
The source disc being listened to in
the navigation system has been
ejected.
Before ejecting the disc, switch the source.
This problem may occur when certain con-
nection methods are used.
There is a problem with the “Rear
display”, for example a faulty wiring
connection.
Check the “Rear display”and its connection.
An AV source that cannot output to
the rear display is selected.
Select an appropriate AV source.
Appendix
En
178
Appendix
Nothing is displayed and the
touch panel keys cannot be
used.
The setting for the rear view camera
is incorrect.
Select the appropriate setting for the rear
view camera.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not
connected.
Press the MAP button, and then press the
MENU button to return to the “Top Menu”
and then select the correct polarity setting for
[Back Camera]. (Page 156)
There is no response when the
touch panel key are touched, or
a different key responds.
The touch panel keys deviate from
the actual positions that respond to
your touch for some reason.
Perform touch panel calibration. (Page 157)
The external storage device
(USB, SD) cannot be used.
The USB storage device has been
removed immediately after plugging
it.
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on.
Problems in the AV screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
CD or DVD playback is not pos-
sible.
The disc is inserted upside down. Insert the disc with the label upward.
The disc is dirty. Clean the disc.
The disc is cracked or otherwise da-
maged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
The files on the disc are an irregular
file format.
Check the file format.
The disc format cannot be played
back.
Replace the disc.
The loaded disc is a type this system
cannot play.
Check what type of disc it is. (For more cau-
tions about handling each type of media,
refer to Page 193.)
The screen is covered by a cau-
tion message and the video can-
not be shown.
The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied.
Connect the parking brake lead correctly, and
apply the parking brake.
The parking brake interlock is acti-
vated.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and apply
the parking brake.
No video output from connected
equipments.
No video output from connected
iPod.
[AV1 Input]or[AV2 Input] setting
is incorrect.
Please read the following page and establish
the setting correctly. (Page 140)
The connection of the USB interface
cable for iPod is incorrect.
Connect both the USB plug and the RCA
cable side. (If only one of these connection
has been made, the iPod will not work prop-
erly.) (Page 31)
The audio or video skips. The navigation system is not firmly
secured.
Secure the navigation system firmly.
No sounds are produced.
The volume level will not rise.
Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly.
The system is performing still, slow
motion, or frame-by-frame playback
with DVD-Video.
There is no sound during still, slow motion, or
frame-by-frame playback with DVD-Video.
The system is paused or performing,
fast reverse or forward during the
disc playback.
For the media other than music CD (CD-DA),
there is no sound on fast reverse or forward.
Appendix
En 179
Appendix
Appendix
The icon 9is displayed, and op-
eration is not possible.
The operation is not compatible
with the video configuration.
This operation is not possible. (For example,
the DVD playing does not feature that angle,
audio system, subtitle language, etc.)
The picture stops (pauses) and
the navigation system cannot be
operated.
The reading of data is impossible
during disc playback.
After touching gonce, start playback once
more.
The picture is stretched, with in-
correct aspect ratio.
The aspect setting is incorrect for
the display.
Select the appropriate setting for that image.
(Page 164, Page 104)
A parental lock message is dis-
played and DVD playback is not
possible.
Parental lock is on. Turn parental lock off or change the level.
(Page 104)
Parental lock for DVD playback
cannot be canceled.
The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number. (Page 104)
Playback is not with the audio
language and subtitle language
settings selected in [DVD
Setup].
The DVD playing does not feature
dialog or subtitles in the language
selected in [DVD Setup].
Switching to a selected language is not possi-
ble if the language selected in [DVD Setup]
is not recorded on the disc.
The picture is extremely unclear/
distorted and dark during play-
back.
The disc features a signal to prohibit
copying. (Some discs may have
this.)
Since the navigation system is compatible
with the copy guard analogue copy protect
system, the picture may suffer from horizon-
tal stripes or other imperfections when a disc
with that kind of protection signal is viewed
on some displays. This does not mean the na-
vigation system is malfunctioning.
Cannot be operated. The iPod is frozen. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
!Update the iPod software version.
An error has occurred. !Reconnect the iPod with the USB interface
cable for iPod.
!Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn
off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to
“Acc off”. Then start the engine again, and
turn the power to the navigation system back
on. If this does not solve the problem, press
the RESET button on the navigation system.
!Update the iPod software version.
Songs on iPod connected with
this system cannot be available
as voice commands or different
song or title from the one that
you said is recognized.
iPod content/data has been up-
dated, but the data on this system’s
memory has not been updated yet.
(i.e., system has not cataloged new
iPod content), or cataloging was not
completed)
If you update the iPod data, activate [VR Cat-
alog Mode] to catalog/transfer the music in-
formation to this system and synchronize the
music information for voice commands with
the data on iPod. (Page 165)
Problems with the phone screen
Symptom Cause Action (Reference)
Dialing is not possible because
the touch panel keys for dialing
are inactive.
Your phone is out of range for ser-
vice.
Retry after re-entering the range for service.
The connection between the cellular
phone and the navigation system
cannot be established now.
Perform the connection process.
Appendix
En
180
Appendix
If the screen becomes frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and turn off
the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc
off”. Then start the engine again, and turn the
power to the navigation system back on. If this
does not solve the problem, press the RESET
button on the navigation system.
Appendix
En 181
Appendix
Appendix
Messages and how to react to them
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system. Refer to the table below to
identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action.
There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a
case, follow the instructions given on the display.
Messages for navigation functions
Message When What to do (Reference)
There is no "Pictures" folder.
Please create /Pictures/ folder
and store the appropriate file
images to be uploaded in that
Folder.
Cannot load the image because
“Pictures”folder is not found in the
inserted external storage device.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 155)
“Pictures”folder exists on the exter-
nal storage device (USB, SD) but
there is no loadable data in the
folder.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 155)
Data Read error. Failed to read the data for some rea-
son.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 155)
The file is corrupt The data is damaged or an attempt
was made to set an image file that
was not made to specifications as
the splash screen.
Use appropriate data and store it correctly.
(Page 155)
Connection failed. The cellular phone’s Bluetooth wire-
less technology is turned off.
Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-
less technology.
The cellular phone is paired (con-
nected) with another device.
Cancel the pairing (connection) and retry.
Rejection has been received from
the cellular phone.
Operate the target phone and accept the con-
nection request from the navigation system.
(Furthermore, check the connection settings
on your cellular phone.)
The target cellular phone cannot be
found.
Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
lar phone is not too far.
Could not find any available
phone.
No available phone exists in the sur-
roundings when the system
searches for connectable cellular
phones featuring Bluetooth wireless
technology.
!Activate the target phone’s Bluetooth wire-
less technology.
!Check whether your cellular phone is acti-
vated and, whether the distance to your cellu-
lar phone is not too far.
Dataloading failed. You may have transferred the data
from your cellular phone in a format
cannot be received by the naviga-
tion system.
!Select a suitable item and format, then
retry. (Page 84)
!Connect your cellular phone with another
method again and retry. (Page 73)
Your mobile phone can not
support this feature.
The connected cellular phone has
no compatibility with the phone
book transfer function of this navi-
gation system.
Depending on the cellular phone, phone
book transfer may not be available.
Appendix
En
182
Appendix
Messages for audio functions
When problems occur with AV source playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer
to the table below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error
persists, record the error message and contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer service center.
The messages in “()”will appear on the “Rear display”.
Built-in DVD drive (AVIC-X910BT)
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Reading error
(ERROR-02-XX)
Dirty Clean the disc.
Scratched disc Replace the disc.
The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Mechanism error Electrical or mechanical Press the RESET button. (Page 26)
Region code error (DIFFERENT
REGION DISC)
The disc does not have the same re-
gion number as the navigation sys-
tem.
Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
correct region number.
UNPLAYABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played
by the navigation system
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-
tem can play.
Thermal error (THERMAL PRO-
TECTION IN MOTION)
The temperature of the navigation
system is outside of the normal op-
erating range
Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
within normal operating limits.
Error not defined (ERROR-FF-
FF)
Undefined error Press the RESET button. (Page 26)
Non-playable tracks are
skipped. (FILE SKIPPED)
Files that are protected by digital
rights management.
The protected files are skipped.
Impossible to play all tracks.
(PROCETED DISC)
All the files on the inserted disc are
secured by DRM.
Replace the disc.
Flash writing error. Impossible
to write on the flash. (CAN
NOT SAVE DATA)
The playback history for VOD con-
tents cannot be saved for some rea-
son.
!Retry.
!If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
Authorization Error (AUTHOR-
IZATION ERROR)
The device does not match the de-
vice registered with the VOD provi-
der. VOD content cannot be played
back.
Check whether this device has been regis-
tered with the VOD provider.
Press track list to play and
title will appear.
The disc has too many files for all ti-
tles to be displayed at once.
Touch the one of listed items to play.
File Not Playable-High Defini-
tion (FILE NOT PLAYABLE-
HIGH DEF)
High definition (HD) DivX video can-
not play.
Create playable one and retry.
Built-in CD drive (AVIC-X710BT)
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Reading error
(ERROR-11, 12, 17, 30)
Dirty Clean the disc.
Scratched disc Replace the disc.
Reading error
(ERROR-10, 11, 12, 15, 17, 30,
A0)
Electrical or mechanical Turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON, or
switch to a different source, then back to the
CD player.
Appendix
En 183
Appendix
Appendix
Reading error
(ERROR-15)
The inserted disc does not contain
any data.
Replace the disc.
Reading error
(ERROR-23)
The CD format cannot be played
back.
Replace the disc.
Reading error
(ERROR-22)
The inserted disc does not contain
any files that can be played back
Replace the disc.
Non-playable tracks are
skipped.
The inserted disc contains files that
are protected by DRM
Replace the disc.
Impossible to play all tracks. All the files on the inserted disc are
secured by DRM.
Replace the disc.
SD/USB/iPod
Message Cause Action (Reference)
Non-playable tracks are
skipped.
Files that are protected by digital
rights management.
The protected files are skipped.
Impossible to play all tracks. All the files on the inserted external
storage device are secured by DRM.
Store playable files.
An error occurred on USB con-
nection. USB devices are not
available to use and iPod
power supply is also unavail-
able.
The USB connector or USB cable is
short-circuited.
Confirm that the USB connector or USB
cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
The connected USB storage device
consumes more than 500 mA (maxi-
mum allowable current).
Disconnect the USB storage device and do
not use it. Turn the ignition switch to OFF,
then to ACC or ON and then connect the
compliant USB storage device.
The USB interface cable for iPod is
short-circuited.
Confirm that USB interface cable for iPod or
USB cable is not caught in something or da-
maged.
Connected iPod is not sup-
ported. Please check instruc-
tion manual.
The iPod is not compatible with this
navigation system.
Use an iPod of a compatible version.
iPod connection failed. Please
reconnect.
Communication failure !Disconnect the cable from iPod. Once iPod
main menu is displayed, connect the cable
again.
!If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
Updating VR dictionary.
Please wait.
iPod function is restricted because
the navigation system is trying to
acquire the information needed to
operate iPod with voice commands
from the iPod currently connected.
•Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until
“iPod VR activation process complete.”ap-
pears.
•Switch the screen to another screen to can-
cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the
acquiring process will resume when the iPod
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 165)
Voice Synching…My voice
system will be busy until I’m
finished, but you can use the
touch interface
Voice operation is restricted be-
cause the navigation system is try-
ing to acquire the information
needed to operate iPod with voice
commands from the iPod currently
connected.
•Wait on the iPod basic screen (Music) until
“iPod VR activation process complete.”ap-
pears.
•Switch the screen to another screen to can-
cel the acquiring process. (In such case, the
acquiring process will resume when the iPod
basic screen (Music) is displayed.) (Page 165)
Appendix
En
184
Appendix
Other sources
Message Cause Action (Reference)
System detected improper
connection of Parking Brake
lead. Please check your con-
figuration for safety. Please
see Operation Manual for
more information regarding
safe operation.
Parking brake lead is incorrectly
connected.
Confirm once more that their connections are
correct.
UPDATING The selected channel is not in-
cluded in your subscription.
Select another channel.
Radio is being updated with the lat-
est encryption code.
Wait until the encryption code is fully up-
dated.
Appendix
En 185
Appendix
Appendix
Positioning technology
AVIC-X910BT accurately measures your cur-
rent location by combining the positioning by
GPS and by “Dead Reckoning”.
AVIC-X710BT accurately measures your cur-
rent location by the GPS positioning.
Positioning by GPS
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a
network of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each
of the satellites, which orbit at a height of
21 000 km, continually broadcasts radio sig-
nals giving time and position information. This
ensures that signals from at least three can be
picked up from any open area on the earth’s
surface.
The accuracy of the GPS information depends
on how good the reception is. When the sig-
nals are strong and reception is good, GPS
can determine latitude, longitude and altitude
for accurate positioning in three dimensions.
But if signal quality is poor, only two dimen-
sions, latitude and longitude, can be obtained
and positioning errors are somewhat greater.
Positioning by “Dead Reckoning”
The built-in sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction
with the “Gyrosensor”and inclination of the
road with the “G sensor”.
The built-in sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discre-
pancies in the distance traveled caused by
driving along winding roads or up slopes.
If you use AVIC-X910BT with connecting the
speed pulse, the system will become more ac-
curate than no connection of speed pulse. So
be sure to connect the speed pulse to get full
positioning accuracy.
pThe position of the speed detection circuit
vary depending on the vehicle model. For
details, consult your authorized Pioneer
dealer or an installation professional.
pSome types of vehicles may not output a
speed signal while driving at just a few kilo-
meters per hour. In such a case, the current
location of your vehicle may not be dis-
played correctly while in traffic congestion
or in a parking lot.
How do GPS and “Dead
Reckoning”work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation sys-
tem continually compares GPS data with your
estimated position as calculated from the data
of built-in sensor. However, if only the data
from the built-in sensor is available for a long
period, positioning errors are gradually com-
pounded until the estimated position becomes
unreliable. For this reason, whenever GPS sig-
nals are available, they are matched with the
data of the built-in sensor and used to correct
it for improved accuracy.
pIf you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors
may suddenly increase because of differ-
ence in wheel diameter. In such case,
pressing the RESET button initialize the
sensor status and it may recover the accu-
racy to normal condition.
Appendix
En
186
Appendix
Map matching
As mentioned, the positioning systems used
by this navigation system are susceptible to
certain errors. Their calculations may, on occa-
sion, place you in a location on the map where
no road exists. In this situation, the processing
system understands that vehicles travel only
on roads, and can correct your position by ad-
justing it to a nearby road. This is called map
matching.
With map matching
Without map matching
Handling large errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by
combining GPS, “Dead Reckoning”and map
matching. However, in some situations, these
functions may not work properly, and the error
may become bigger.
When positioning by GPS is
impossible
!GPS positioning is disabled if signals can-
not be received from more than two GPS
satellites.
!In some driving conditions, signals from
GPS satellites may not reach your vehicle.
In this case, it is impossible for the system
to use GPS positioning.
In tunnels or en-
closed parking
garages
Under elevated
roads or similar
structures
When driving
among high build-
ings
When driving through
a dense forest or tall
trees
!If a car phone or cellular phone is used
near the GPS antenna, GPS reception may
be lost temporarily.
!Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray
paint or car wax, because this may block
the reception of GPS signals. Snow buildup
can also degrade the signals, so keep the
antenna clear.
pIf a GPS signal have not been received for a
long time, your vehicle’s actual position
and the current position mark on the map
may diverge considerably or may not be up-
dated. In such case, once GPS reception is
restored, accuracy will be recovered.
Appendix
En 187
Appendix
Appendix
Conditions likely to cause
noticeable positioning errors
For various reasons, such as the state of the
road you are traveling on and the reception
status of the GPS signal, the actual position of
your vehicle may differ from the position dis-
played on the map screen.
!If you make a shallow turn.
!If there is a parallel road.
!If there is another road very nearby, such
as in the case of an elevated freeway.
!If you take a recently opened road that is
not on the map.
!If you drive in zigzags.
!If the road has a series of hairpin bends.
!If there is a loop or similar road configura-
tion.
!If you take a ferry.
!If you are driving on a long, straight road or
a gently curving road.
Appendix
En
188
Appendix
!If you are on a steep mountain road with
many height changes.
!If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot
or similar structure using a spiral ramp.
!If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or si-
milar structure.
!If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
!If you put on chains, or change your tires
for ones with a different size.
!If trees or other obstacles block the GPS
signals for a considerable period.
!If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-
stop manner, as in a traffic congestion.
!If you join the road after driving around a
large parking lot.
!When you drive around a traffic circle.
!When starting driving immediately after
starting the engine.
Route setting information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your
destination by applying certain built-in rules to
the map data. This section provides some use-
ful information about how a route is set.
Appendix
En 189
Appendix
Appendix
CAUTION
When a route is calculated, the route and voice
guidance for the route are automatically set.
Also, for day or time traffic regulations, only infor-
mation about traffic regulations applicable at the
time when the route was calculated is shown.
One-way streets and street closures may not be
taken into consideration. For example, if a street
is open during the morning only, but you arrive
later, it would be against the traffic regulations so
you cannot drive along the set route. When driv-
ing, please follow the actual traffic signs. Also,
the system may not know some traffic regula-
tions.
!The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the na-
vigation system while taking the type of
streets or traffic regulations into account. It
is not necessarily an optimum route. (In
some cases, you may not be able to set the
streets you want to take. If you need to take
a certain street, set a waypoint on that
street.)
!If the destination is too far, there may be in-
stances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set waypoints along
the way.)
!During voice guidance, turns and intersec-
tions from the freeway are announced.
However, if you pass intersections, turns,
and other guidance points in rapid succes-
sion, some may delay or not be announced.
!It is possible that guidance may direct you
off a freeway and then back on again.
!In some cases, the route may require you
to travel in the opposite direction to your
current heading. In such cases, you are in-
structed to turn around, so please turn
around safely by following the actual traffic
rules.
!In some cases, a route may begin on the
opposite side of a railway or river from your
actual current location. If this happens,
drive towards your destination for a while,
and try route calculation again.
!When there is a traffic congestion ahead, a
detour route may not be suggested if driv-
ing through the traffic congestion would
still be better than taking the detour.
!There may be instances when the starting
point, the waypoint and the destination
point are not on the highlighted route.
!The number of traffic circle exits displayed
on the screen may differ from the actual
number of roads.
Route highlighting
!Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
color on the map.
!The immediate vicinity of your starting
point and destination may not be high-
lighted, and neither will areas with particu-
larly complex road layouts. Consequently,
the route may appear to be cut off on the
display, but voice guidance will continue.
Auto reroute function
!If you deviate from the set route, the system
will re-calculate the route from that point
so that you remain on track to the destina-
tion.
!This function may not work under certain
conditions.
Supplemental information about
directions
Symbol Meanings
Highway
Freeway exit left/right
Traffic circle (clockwise and anti-clock-
wise)
Ferry landings (port of departure or arri-
val)
Car only road (start and end)
Appendix
En
190
Appendix
Car train (start and end)
Other information
Supplemental information about
traffic icon
Icon Meanings
Stop-and-go traffic
Stopped traffic
Closed/blocked roads
Accidents, constructions, etc.
Road works
Road narrows, lane closures
Warnings, other dangers
Bad weather conditions
Police ahead
Handling and care of discs
Some basic precautions are necessary when
handling your discs.
Built-in drive and care
!Use only conventional, fully circular discs.
Do not use shaped discs.
!Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or
otherwise damaged discs as they may da-
mage the built-in drive.
!Do not touch the recorded surface of the
discs.
!Store discs in their cases when not in use.
!Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir-
onments including under direct sunlight.
!Do not attach labels, write on or apply che-
micals to the surface of the discs.
!To clean a disc, wipe it with a soft cloth,
moving outward from the center.
!Condensation may temporarily impair the
built-in drive’s performance. Leave it to ad-
just to the warmer temperature for about
one hour. Also, wipe any damp discs with a
soft cloth.
!Playback of discs may not be possible be-
cause of disc characteristics, disc format,
recorded application, playback environ-
ment, storage conditions and so on.
!Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
!Read the precautions for discs before
using them.
Ambient conditions for playing
a disc
!At extremely high temperatures, a tempera-
ture cutout protects this product by switch-
ing it off automatically.
!Despite our careful design of the product,
small scratches that do not affect actual
operation may appear on the disc surface
as a result of mechanical wear, ambient
conditions for use or handling of the disc.
This is not a sign of the malfunction of this
product. Consider it to be normal wear and
tear.
Appendix
En 191
Appendix
Appendix
Playable discs
DVD-Video and CD
DVD and CD discs that display the logos
shown below generally can be played on this
built-in DVD drive.
DVD-Video
CD
pis a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
pIt is not possible to play DVD-Audio discs.
This DVD drive may not be able to play all
discs bearing the marks shown above.
AVCHD recorded discs
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded
in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Defi-
nition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If
inserted, the disc may not be ejected.
Playing DualDisc
!DualDiscs are two-sided discs that have a
recordable CD for audio on one side and a
recordable DVD for video on the other.
!Playback of the DVD side is possible with
this navigation system. However, since the
CD side of DualDiscs is not physically com-
patible with the general CD standard, it
may not be possible to play the CD side
with this navigation system.
!Frequent loading and ejecting of a Dual-
Disc may result in scratches to the disc.
!Serious scratches can lead to playback pro-
blems on this navigation system. In some
cases, a DualDisc may become stuck in
the disc loading slot and will not eject. To
prevent this, we recommend you refrain
from using DualDisc with this navigation
system.
!Please refer to the manufacturer for more
detailed information about DualDiscs.
Dolby Digital
AVIC-X910BT will down-mix Dolby Digital sig-
nals internally and the sound will be output in
stereo.
pManufactured under license from Dolby
Laboratories. “Dolby”and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
DTS sound
DTS audio cannot be output, so select an
audio setting other than DTS.
“DTS”is registered trademarks of DTS, Inc.
Appendix
En
192
Appendix
Detailed information for
playable media
Compatibility
Common notes about disc compatibility
!Certain functions of this product may not
be available for some discs.
!Compatibility with all discs is not guaran-
teed.
!It is not possible to play back DVD-ROM/
DVD-RAM discs.
!Playback of discs may become impossible
with direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures, or depending on the storage
conditions in the vehicle.
DVD-Video discs
!DVD-Video discs that have incompatible re-
gion numbers cannot be played on this
DVD drive. The region number of the player
can be found on this product’s chassis.
DVD-R/DVD-RW/DVD-R DL (Dual
Layer) discs
!Unfinalized discs which have been re-
corded with the Video format (video mode)
cannot be played back.
!Discs which have been recorded with the
Video Recording format (VR mode) can be
played back. However, unfinalized discs
may not be played back. Unplayable discs
should be finalized.
!DVD-R DL (Dual Layer) discs which have
been recorded with Layer Jump recording
cannot be played back.
!For more information about recording
mode, please contact the manufacturer of
media, recorders, or writing software.
!The following logo indicates that this unit is
compatible with DVD-RW discs which have
been recorded with the Video Recording
format (VR mode).
CD-R/CD-RW discs
!Unfinalized discs cannot be played back.
!It may not be possible to play back CD-R/
CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re-
corder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on
the disc, or dirt, scratches or condensation
on the lens of the built-in drive.
!Playback of discs recorded on a personal
computer may not be possible, depending
on the recording device, writing software,
their settings, and other environmental fac-
tors.
!Please record with the correct format. (For
more details, please contact manufacturer
of media, recorders, or writing software.)
!Titles and other text information recorded
on a CD-R/CD-RW disc may not be dis-
played by this product (in the case of audio
data (CD-DA)).
!Read the precautions with CD-R/CD-RW
discs before using them.
Common notes about the external
storage device (USB, SD)
!Depending on the kind of the external sto-
rage device (USB, SD) you use, this naviga-
tion system may not recognize the storage
device or files may not be played back prop-
erly.
!Do not leave the external storage device
(USB, SD) in any location with high tem-
peratures.
!The text information of some audio and
video files may not be correctly displayed.
!File extensions must be used properly.
Appendix
En 193
Appendix
Appendix
!There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of files on an external storage de-
vice (USB, SD) with complex folder hierar-
chies.
!Operations may vary depending on the
kind of an external storage device (USB,
SD).
!It may not be possible to play some music
files from SD or USB because of file char-
acteristics, file format, recorded applica-
tion, playback environment, storage
conditions, and so on.
!Video playback from SD or USB will be
paused when the navigation is displayed.
USB storage device compatibility
=For more details about USB storage device
compatibility with this navigation system,
refer to Specifications on page 212.
Protocol: bulk
Subclass: SCSI (06h)
!You cannot connect a USB storage device
to this navigation system via a USB hub.
!Partitioned USB memory is not compatible
with this navigation system.
!Firmly secure the USB storage device when
driving. Do not let the USB storage device
fall onto the floor, where it may become
jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
!There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
!Some USB storage devices connected to
this navigation system may generate noise
on the radio.
!Do not connect anything other than the
USB memory device.
The sequence of audio files on USB mem-
ory
For USB memory, the sequence is different
from that of USB memory device.
SD memory card and SDHC memory card
!For more details about SD memory card
compatibility with this navigation system,
refer to Specifications on page 212.
Handling guidelines and
supplemental information
!This system is not compatible with Multi
Media Card (MMC).
!Copyright protected files cannot be played
back.
Notes specific to DivX files
!Only DivX files downloaded from DivX part-
ner sites are guarantee for proper opera-
tion. Unauthorized DivX files may not
operate properly.
!DRM rental files cannot be operated until
playing back is started.
!The navigation system corresponds to a
DivX file display of up to 1 590 minutes 43
seconds. Search operations beyond this
time limit are prohibited.
!DivX VOD file playback requires supplying
the ID code of this navigation system to the
DivX VOD provider. Regarding the ID code,
refer to Displaying your DivX VOD registra-
tion code on page 105.
!Plays all versions of DivX video (including
DivX 6) with standard playback of DivX
media files.
!For more details about DivX, visit the follow-
ing site:
http://www.divx.com/
DivX subtitle files
!Srt format subtitle files with the extension
“.srt”can be used.
!Only one subtitle file can be used for each
DivX file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be
associated.
Appendix
En
194
Appendix
!Subtitle files that are named with the same
character string as the DivX file before the
extension are associated with the DivX file.
The character strings before the extension
must be exactly the same. However, if there
is only one DivX file and one subtitle file in
a single folder, the files are associated even
if the file names are not the same.
!The subtitle file must be stored in the same
folder as the DivX file.
!Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any
more subtitle files will not be recognized.
!Up to 64 characters can be used for the
name of the subtitle file, including the ex-
tension. If more than 64 characters are
used for the file name, the subtitle file may
not be recognized.
!The character code for the subtitle file
should comply with ISO-8859-1. Using char-
acters other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the
characters to be displayed incorrectly.
!The subtitles may not be displayed correctly
if the displayed characters in the subtitle
file include control code.
!For materials that use a high transfer rate,
the subtitles and video may not be comple-
tely synchronized.
!If multiple subtitles are programed to dis-
play within a very short time frame, such as
0.1 seconds, the subtitles may not be dis-
played at the correct time.
Appendix
En 195
Appendix
Appendix
Media compatibility chart
General
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File system
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo and Joliet
ISO9660 level 1,
ISO9660 level 2,
Romeo, Joliet
and UDF 1.02
FAT16/FAT32
Maximum number
of folders 99 700 FAT32: No limit.
FAT16: 512 (including files)
Maximum number
of files 999 3 500 FAT32: No limit.
FAT16: 512 (including folders)
Playable file types MP3, WMA,
AAC, WAV MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX MP3, WMA, AAC, WAV, AVI,
MPEG-4
MP3 compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension .mp3
Bit rate 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz for empha-
sis) 16 kHz to 48 kHz
ID3 tag ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.3
Notes:
!Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x exist.
!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO, m3u playlist
Appendix
En
196
Appendix
WMA compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension .wma
Bit rate
48 kbps to
320 kbps (CBR),
VBR
5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Ver. 9: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR),
VBR
Ver. 7 or 8: 128 kbps to 192 kbps
(CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency 32 kHz to 48 kHz 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Note:
!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
Windows Media Audio 9 Professional, Lossless, Voice
WAV compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension .wav
AVIC-X910BT cannot play WAV files
on the built-in DVD drive.
.wav
Format
Linear PCM
(LPCM), MS
ADPCM
Linear PCM (LPCM), IMA-ADPCM
Sampling frequency
LPCM: 16 kHz to
48 kHz
MS ADPCM:
22.05 kHz and
44.1 kHz
LPCM: 16 kHz to 48 kHz
IMA-ADPCM: 22.05 kHz and
44.1 kHz
Quantization bits
LPCM: 8 bits
and 16 bits
MS ADPCM:
4 bits
LPCM: 8 bits and 16 bits
IMA-ADPCM: 3 bits and 4 bits
Note:
The sampling frequency shown in the display may be rounded.
Appendix
En 197
Appendix
Appendix
AAC compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension .m4a
Bit rate 16 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR)
Sampling frequency 11 kHz to
44.1 kHz 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz
Notes:
!The navigation system plays back AAC files encoded by iTunes.
!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
Apple Lossless, files encoded with VBR
DivX compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension
AVIC-X710BT
cannot play
DivX files.
.avi/.divx
DivX files on the external storage
device (USB, SD) cannot be played.
Profile (DivX ver-
sion)
Home Theater Ver. 3.11/Ver. 4.x/
Ver. 5.x/Ver. 6.x
Compatible audio
codec MP3, Dolby Digital
Bit rate (MP3) 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR
Sampling frequency
(MP3)
16 kHz to 48 kHz (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz,
48 kHz for emphasis)
Maximum image
size 720 pixels × 576 pixels
Maximum file size 4 GB
Notes:
!The navigation system is not compatible with the following:
DivX Ultra format, DivX files without video data, DivX files encoded with LPCM (Linear PCM) audio codec
!Depending on the file information composition, such as the number of audio streams, there may be a slight
delay in the start of playback on discs.
!If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback stops before the end.
!Some special operations may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files.
!Files with high transfer rates may not be played back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4 Mbps for CDs and
10.08 Mbps for DVDs.
Appendix
En
198
Appendix
AVI compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension
AVI files cannot be played on the built-in drive.
.avi
Compatible video
codec MPEG-4
Compatible audio
codec ADPCM
Recommended
video specifications
Image size: VGA (640 pixels x 480
pixels)
Bit rate: 480 kbps
Frame rate: 24 fps
MPEG-4 compatibility
Media CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X710BT
CD-R/-RW
AVIC-X910BT
DVD-R/-RW/-
RDL
AVIC-X910BT
USB storage
device
(All models)
SD memory
card
(All models)
File extension
MPEG-4 files cannot be played on the built-in drive.
.mp4
Compatible video
codec MPEG-4
Compatible audio
codec AAC
Recommended
video specifications
Image size: VGA (640 pixels x 480
pixels)
Bit rate: 480 kbps
Frame rate: 24 fps
Common notes
!The navigation system may not operate cor-
rectly, depending on the application used
to encode WMA files.
!Depending on the version of Windows
Media Player used to encode WMA files,
album names and other text information
may not be correctly displayed.
!There may be a slight delay when starting
playback of audio files encoded with image
data.
!The navigation system is not compatible
with packet write data transfer.
!This navigation system can recognize up to
32 characters, beginning with the first char-
acter, including extension for the file and
folder name. Depending on the display
area, the navigation system may try to dis-
play them with a reduced font size. How-
ever, the maximum number of the
characters that you can display varies ac-
cording to the width of each character, and
of the display area.
!Folder selection sequence or other opera-
tions may be altered, depending on the en-
coding or writing software.
!Regardless of the length of blank section
between the songs of original recording,
compressed audio discs play with a short
pause between songs.
Appendix
En 199
Appendix
Appendix
Example of a hierarchy
The following figure is an example of the tier
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-
ure indicate the order in which folder numbers
are assigned and the order to be played back.
: Folder
:File
1
2
3
4
5
6
L
e
v
e
l 1 L
e
v
e
l 2 L
e
v
e
l 3 L
e
v
e
l 4
Notes
!This product assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
!If there is a folder that does not contain any
playable file, the folder itself will display in the
folder list but you cannot check any files in
the folder. (A blank list will appear.) Also,
these folders will be skipped without display-
ing the folder number.
Bluetooth
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless radio con-
nectivity technology that is developed as a
cable replacement for cellular phones, hand-
held PCs and other devices. Bluetooth oper-
ates in 2.4 GHz frequency range and transmits
voice and data at speeds up to 1 megabit per
second. Bluetooth was launched by a special
interest group (SIG) comprising Ericsson Inc.,
Intel Corp., Nokia Corp., Toshiba and IBM in
1998, and it is currently developed by nearly
2 000 companies worldwide.
!The Bluetoothâword mark and logos are re-
gistered trademarks owned by Bluetooth
SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Pioneer Corporation is under license. Other
trademarks and trade names are those of
their respective owners.
About the SAT RADIO
READY Logo
The SAT RADIO READY logo indicates that the
Satellite Radio Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM
tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold
separately) can be controlled by this naviga-
tion system. Please inquire with your dealer or
nearest authorized Pioneer service station re-
garding the satellite radio tuner that can be
connected to this navigation system.
Note:
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide listeners
in their cars and at home with crystal-clear
sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satel-
lite radio will create and package over 100
channels of digital- quality music, news,
sports, talk and children’s programming.
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all re-
lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite
Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.
HD Radio Technology
The HD Radio Ready logo is a proprietary tra-
demark of iBiquity Digital Corp.
Appendix
En
200
Appendix
SD and SDHC logo
SD Logo is a trademark.
SDHC Logo is a trademark.
WMA
The Windows Mediaälogo printed on the box
indicates that this unit can play back WMA
data.
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and
refers to an audio compression technology
that is developed by Microsoft Corporation.
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows
Media Player version 7 or later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra-
demarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other
countries.
DivX
DivX is a compressed digital video format cre-
ated by the DivX video codec from DivX, Inc.
This unit can play DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs.
Keeping the same terminology as DVD video,
individual DivX video files are called “Titles”.
When naming files/titles on a CD-R/RW or a
DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind
that by default they will be played in alphabeti-
cal order.
Plays DivXâvideo.
pDivXâis a registered trademark of DivX,
Inc., and is used under license.
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4. Sev-
eral applications can be used to encode AAC
files, but file formats and extensions differ de-
pending on the application which is used to
encode. This unit plays back AAC files en-
coded by iTunes version 4.6.
Detailed information
regarding connectable iPods
CAUTION
!Pioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost
from an iPod, even if that data is lost while
using the navigation system.
Appendix
En 201
Appendix
Appendix
!Do not leave the iPod in direct sunlight for ex-
tended amounts of time. Extended exposure
to direct sunlight can result in iPod malfunc-
tion due to the resulting high temperature.
!Do not leave the iPod in any location with
high temperatures.
!Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not
let the iPod fall onto the floor, where it may be-
come jammed under the brake or gas pedal.
For details, refer to the iPod’s manuals.
iPod
“Made for iPod”means that an electronic ac-
cessory has been designed to connect specifi-
cally to iPod and has been certified by the
developer to meet Apple performance stan-
dards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
iPhone
“Works with iPhone”means that an electronic
accessory has been designed to connect spe-
cifically to iPhone and has been certified by
the developer to meet Apple performance
standards.
Apple is not responsible for the operation of
this device or its compliance with safety and
regulatory standards.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iTunes
iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
Using the LCD screen correctly
Handling the LCD screen
!When the LCD screen is subjected to direct
sunlight for a long period of time, it will be-
come very hot, resulting in possible da-
mage to the LCD screen. When not using
this navigation system, avoid exposing it to
direct sunlight as much as possible.
!The LCD screen should be used within the
temperature ranges shown in “Specifica-
tions”.
!Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures
higher or lower than the operating tem-
perature range, because the LCD screen
may not operate normally and could be da-
maged.
!The LCD screen is exposed in order to in-
crease its visibility within the vehicle.
Please do not press strongly on it as this
may damage it.
!Do not push the LCD screen with excessive
force as this may scratch it.
!Never touch the LCD screen with anything
besides your finger when operating the
Touch panel functions. The LCD screen can
scratch easily.
Appendix
En
202
Appendix
Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen
!If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air
conditioner, make sure that air from the air
conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from
the heater may break the LCD screen, and
cool air from the cooler may cause moist-
ure to form inside the navigation unit, re-
sulting in possible damage.
!Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are
due to the characteristics of the LCD
screen and do not indicate a malfunction.
!The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
!When using a cellular phone, keep the an-
tenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the
video in the form of disturbances such as
spots or colored stripes.
Maintaining the LCD screen
!When removing dust from the LCD screen
or cleaning it, first turn the system power
off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
!When wiping the LCD screen, take care not
to scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or
abrasive chemical cleaners.
LED (light-emitting diode)
backlight
A light emitting diode is used inside the dis-
play to illuminate the LCD screen.
!At low temperatures, using the LED back-
light may increase image lag and degrade
the image quality because of the character-
istics of the LCD screen. Image quality will
improve with an increase in temperature.
!The product lifetime of the LED backlight is
more than 10 000 hours. However, it may
decrease if used in high temperatures.
!If the LED backlight reaches the end of its
product lifetime, the screen will become
dimmer and the image will no longer be
visible. In that case, please consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER
Service Station.
Appendix
En 203
Appendix
Appendix
Display information
Destination Menu
Page
[Address]42
[POI]
[Around Current GPS Location]45
[Around Destination]45
[Around Cursor]44
[Along Route]45
[Around entered address]45
[Saved Criteria]47
[Register Search Criteria]46
[Favorites]50
[History]50
[USB/SD]48
[Return Home]51
[Delete Route]63
[Saved Routes]51
[Route Function]
[Route info]59
[Itinerary]60
[Edit Route]62
[Save Route]62
[Coordinate]49
[MSN Direct]64
Phone Menu
Page
[Dial Pad]78
[Call Home]79
[GOOG-411]80
[Phone Volume]82
[Received Calls]78
[Dialed Numbers]78
[Missed Calls]78
[Phone Book Transfer]80
[Phone Settings]
[Connection]76
[Bluetooth On/Off]82
[Auto Answer Preference]82
[Refuse All Calls]83
[Echo Cancel]83
[Auto Connect]83
[Edit Name]83
[Clear Memory]81
[Bluetooth Software Update]85
Appendix
En
204
Appendix
Settings Menu
Navi Settings
Page
[GPS & Time Settings] 143
[Time Settings] 144
[Map Visual]
[POI Settings] 150
[3D Settings] 145
[Map Settings] 145
[Displayed Info] 146
[Smart Zoom] 146
[Overview Mode] 147
[Manage Track Logs] 152
[Route]
[Method:] 147
[U-turn penalty:] 148
[Unpaved Roads] 148
[Highways] 148
[Ferries] 148
[U-turns] 148
[Permit Needed] 148
[Toll Roads] 148
[Warnings]
[Warn When Speeding] 148
[Regional Settings] 149
[Set Home] 154
[Demo Mode] 149
[Sound settings] 149
[About] 150
Appendix
En 205
Appendix
Appendix
System Settings menu
Page
[Language] 155
[Splash Screen] 155
[Back Camera] 156
[Screen Calibration] 157
[Picture Adjustment] 157
[Illumi Color] 157
[Service Information] 158
[Restore/Delete]
[Restore Factory Settings] 158
[Delete user information] 158
[Screen Off] 159
AV System Settings menu
Page
[AV1 Input] 163
[AV2 Input] 163
[Ant CTRL] 164
[Wide Mode] 164
[MUTE Input/GUIDE] 164
[Rear SP] 165
[VR Catalog Mode] 165
Appendix
En
206
Appendix
AV Sound Settings menu
Page
[FAD/BAL]([Balance]) 159
[EQ] 160
[Loudness] 161
[Sub Woofer] 162
[HPF] 162
[SLA] 162
[Bass Booster] 163
Shortcut menu
Map Confirmation Screen
Page
[Map]52
[Save as...]55
[Add Pin]56
[Add POI]57
[Add Favorite]58
[Route...]54
[Go Here Now]55
[Add Via]55
[Continue]55
[Starting Point]55
[Info]56
[Call]79
Appendix
En 207
Appendix
Appendix
Glossary
AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology
standard used with MPEG-2 and MPEG-4.
Aspect ratio
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen.
A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of
16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional
presence and atmosphere.
Bit rate
This expresses data volume per second, or bps
units (bits per second). The higher the rate,
the more information is available to reproduce
the sound. Using the same encoding method
(such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better
the sound.
Built-in sensor
The built-in sensor that enables the system to
estimate your vehicle’s position.
CD-DA
This stands for a general music CD (commer-
cial-release audio CD). In this manual, this
word is sometime used for a distinction be-
tween data CDs (which include compressed
audio files) and general music CDs.
Chapter
Titles of DVD-Video or DVD-VR are in turn di-
vided into chapters which are numbered in
the same way as the chapters of a book. With
discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find
a desired scene with chapter search.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your cur-
rent location is shown on the map by a red tri-
angle mark.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your
journey.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by
DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com-
pressed video with high visual quality that
maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files
can also include advanced media features like
menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for down-
load online, and you can create your own
using your personal content and easy-to-use
tools from DivX.com.
DivX Certified
DivX Certified products are officially tested by
the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all
versions of DivX video, including DivX 6.
Favorites
A frequently visited location (such as your
workplace or a relative’s home) that you can
register to allow easy routing.
GPS
Global Positioning System. A network of satel-
lites that provides navigation signals for a vari-
ety of purposes.
Guidance mode
The mode in which guidance is given as you
drive to your destination; the system automati-
cally switches to this mode as soon as a route
has been set.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your
route, generally intersections. The next gui-
dance point along your route is indicated on
the map by the yellow flag icon.
Home location
Your registered home location.
Appendix
En 209
Appendix
Appendix
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related
information in an MP3 file. This embedded in-
formation can include the track title, the ar-
tist’s name, the album title, the music genre,
the year of production, comments and other
data. The contents can be freely edited using
software with ID3 Tag editing functions.
Although the tags are restricted by the num-
ber of characters, the information can be
viewed when the track is played back.
ISO9660 format
This is the international standard for the for-
mat logic of DVD/CD-ROM folders and files.
For the ISO9660 format, there are regulations
for the following two levels:
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con-
sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English
capital letters, half-byte numerals and the “_”
sign, with a file-extension of three characters).
Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters (in-
cluding the separation mark “.”and a file ex-
tension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
!Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name
consists of up to 8 characters, half-byte
English capital letters, half-byte numerals
and the “_”sign, with a file-extension of
three characters).
!Level 2:
The file name can have up to 31 characters
(including the separation mark “.”and a file
extension). Each folder contains less than 8
hierarchies.
!Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
JPEG
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts
Group, and is an international still image com-
pression standard.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an
audio compression standard established by a
working group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna-
tional Standards Organization). MP3 is able to
compress audio data to about 1/10th the size
of a conventional disc.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts
Group, and is an international video image
compression standard.
Multi-angle
With regular TV programs, although multiple
cameras are used to simultaneously shoot
scenes, only images from one camera at a
time are transmitted to your TV. Some DVDs
feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let-
ting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some videos feature dialog recorded in multi-
ple languages or audio recorded in multiple
tracks. For example, dialog in up to 8 lan-
guages can be recorded on a single DVD-Vi-
deo, letting you choose the language as
desired.
Multi-session
Multi-session is a recording method that al-
lows additional data to be recorded later.
When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD-R or
CD-RW, etc., all data from beginning to end is
treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses-
sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses-
sions in one disc.
Multi-subtitle
For example, subtitles in up to 32 languages
can be recorded on a single DVD-Video, letting
you choose as desired.
Appendix
En
210
Appendix
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing
individual files to a CD-R, etc. whenever re-
quired, just as is done with files on floppy or
hard disks.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-or-
iented scenes feature parental lock which pre-
vents children from viewing such scenes. With
this kind of disc, if you set the unit’s parental
lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for
children will be disabled, or these scenes will
be skipped.
Phone book
An address book on user’s phone is collec-
tively referred to as “Phone book”. Depending
on the cellular phone, the “Phone book”may
be called a name such as “Contacts”,“Busi-
ness card”or something else.
Point of Interest (POI)
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations
stored in the data, such as railway stations,
shops, restaurants, and amusement parks.
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region
numbers indicating the area in which they
were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos-
sible unless it features the same region num-
ber as the DVD player.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a
specific location; route setting is done auto-
matically by the system when you specify a
destination.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your
destination. It is highlighted in bright color on
the map.
Title
DVD-Video or DVD-VR discs have a high data
capacity, enabling recording of multiple videos
on a single disc. If, for example, one disc con-
tains three separate videos, they are divided
into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy
the convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
Track log
Your navigation system logs routes that you al-
ready passed through if the track logger is ac-
tivated. This recorded route is called a “track
log”. It is handy when you want to check a
route traveled or if returning along a complex
route.
VBR
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally
speaking, CBR (constant bit rate) is more
widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit
rate according to the needs of audio compres-
sion, it is possible to achieve compression-
priority sound quality.
Voice guidance
The giving of directions by navigation voice
while in guidance.
Waypoint
A location that you choose to visit before your
destination; a journey can be built up from
multiple waypoints and the destination.
WMA
WMA is short for Windows Media™Audio
and refers to an audio compression technol-
ogy that is developed by Microsoft
Corporation.
Appendix
En 211
Appendix
Appendix
Specifications
General
Rated power source ............... 14.4 V DC
(allowable voltage range:
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)
Grounding system ................... Negative type
Maximum current consumption
........................................... 10.0 A
Dimensions (W × H × D):
Chassis ............................... 178 mm × 100 mm ×
157 mm
(7 in. × 3-7/8 in. × 6-1/8 in.)
Nose ..................................... 171 mm × 97 mm × 8 mm
(6-3/4 in. × 3-7/8 in. ×
3/8 in.)
Weight:
AVIC-X910BT .................... 2.1 kg
AVIC-X710BT .................... 2.1 kg
NAND flash memory ............. 2 GB
Navigation
GPS Receiver:
System ................................ L1, C/Acode GPS
SPS (Standard Positioning
Service)
Reception system .......... 30-channel multi-channel
reception system
Reception frequency .... 1 575.42 MHz
Sensitivity .......................... –140 dBm (typ)
Position update frequency
........................................... Approx. once per second
GPS antenna:
Antenna ............................. Micro strip flat antenna/
right-handed helical polari-
zation
Antenna cable ................. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)
Dimensions (W × H × D)
........................................... 33 mm × 15 mm × 36 mm
(1-1/4 in. × 5/8 in. ×
1-3/8 in.)
Weight ................................ 96 g (0.2 lbs)
Display
Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 5.8 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area:
128 mm × 72 mm)
Pixels ............................................. 384 000 (800 × 480)
Display method ........................ TFT Active matrix driving
Backlight ..................................... LED
Color system .............................. NTSC compatible
Tolerable temperature range:
Power on ............................ +14 °F to +140 °F
Power off ............................ –4 °F to +176 °F
Audio
Maximum power output ....... 50 W × 4
50 W × 2 ch/4 W+70W×
1 ch/2 W(for subwoofer)
Continuous power output ... 22 W × 4 (50 Hz to 15 kHz,
5 %THD, 4 WLOAD, Both
Channels Driven)
Load impedance ...................... 4 W(4 Wto 8 W[2 Wfor 1 ch]
allowable)
Preout output level (max) .... 2.2 V
Preout impedance .................. 1 kohm
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):
Low
Frequency ................ 40 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/160 Hz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
Mid
Frequency ................ 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
High
Frequency ................ 3.15 kHz/8 kHz/10 kHz/
12.5 kHz
Q Factor .................... 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15 (+6 dB
when boosted)
Gain ............................ ±12 dB
Loudness contour:
Low ....................................... +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB
(10 kHz)
Mid ....................................... +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB
(10 kHz)
High ..................................... +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB
(10 kHz)
(volume: –30 dB)
HPF:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Slope .................................... –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer:
Frequency .......................... 50 Hz/63 Hz/80 Hz/100 Hz/
125 Hz
Slope .................................... –18 dB/oct
Gain ...................................... –24/+6 dB
Phase .................................. Normal/Reverse
Bass boost:
Gain ...................................... 0 dB to +12 dB
DVD drive (AVIC-X910BT)
System .......................................... DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,
AAC, DivX system
Usable discs .............................. DVD-Video, CD, MP3, WMA,
AAC, DivX
Appendix
En
212
Appendix
Region number ........................ 1
Signal format:
Sampling frequency ..... 44.1 kHz/48 kHz/96 kHz
Number of quantization bits
........................................... 16 bit/20 bit/24 bit; linear
Frequency response ............... 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency
96 kHz)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A
network))
Dynamic range ......................... 95 dB (1 kHz) (CD: 94 dB
(1 kHz))
Distortion ..................................... 0.008 % (1 kHz)
Output level:
Video .................................... 1.0 Vp-p/75 W(±0.2 V)
Audio ................................... 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Number of channels .............. 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.9.0 L3
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded
by iTunes):
.m4a
DivX decoding format ............ Home Theater Ver.3.11,
Ver.4.X, Ver.5.X, Ver.6.X :
.avi, .divx
CD drive (AVIC-X710BT)
System .......................................... CD, MP3, WMA, AAC sys-
tem
Usable discs .............................. CD, MP3, WMA, AAC
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 94 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
MP3 decoding format ........... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format ......... Ver.7,7.1,8,9,10 (2 ch audio)
(Windows Media Player)
AAC decoding format ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iTunes en-
coded only)
WAVE SIGNAL FORMAT ...... Linear-PCM, MS ADPCM
(Non Compressed)
USB
USB standard spec. ............... USB 2.0 High Speed
Max current supply ................. 500 mA
Max memory capacity ........... 8 GB
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
USB class .................................... Mass storage class
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
MPEG4
SD
Compatible physical format
..................................................... Version 2.00
Max memory capacity ........... 8 GB
File system .................................. FAT16, FAT32
Decoding format ...................... MP3/WMA/AAC/WAVE/
MPEG4
Bluetooth
Version .......................................... Bluetooth 1.2 certified
Output power ............................ +4 dBm Max.
(Power class 2)
FM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity ..................... 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 W, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 75 dB (IHF-A network)
Distortion ..................................... 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
stereo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response ............... 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz (±3 dB)
Stereo separation .................... 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
AM tuner
Frequency range ...................... 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity ..................... 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 65 dB (IHF-A network)
CEA2006 Specifications
Power output ............................. 14 W RMS × 4 Channels
(4 Wand ≦1 % THD+N)
S/N ratio ....................................... 91 dBA (reference: 1 W into
4W)
Note
Specifications and design are subject to possible
modifications without notice due to im-
provements.
Appendix
En 213
Appendix
Appendix
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU
TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
TEL: 905-479-4411
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL: 55-9178-4270
先鋒股份有限公司
總公司:台北市中山北路二段44號13樓
電話: (02) 2521-3588
先鋒電子（香港）有限公司
香港九龍尖沙咀海港城世界商業中心9樓901-6室
電話: (0852) 2848-6488
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2009 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in China
<CRB2985-A/S> UC
<KKYZX> <09D00000>
